JP2023138788A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: On the basis of the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during execution of a privilege game, a satisfaction signal indicating satisfaction of the specific condition is output by first output means and a determination result signal indicating the determination result by the determination means is output by second output means. The determination information signal corresponding to the determination information acquired by determination information acquisition means is output before a determination condition is satisfied by third output means. On the basis of reception of the determination result signal, controlled means executes a first performance corresponding to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. On the basis of reception of the determination information signal, specific information is updated according to the determination information indicated by the received determination information signal. When a satisfaction signal is received, whether or not a second performance is to be executed is determined using specific information. Thereby, it is possible to increase a player's interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby awarding an advantageous winning game to the player. Furthermore, in addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of interesting performances are performed to increase the interest of the game.

JP2003-325886A

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: a main control means that executes main control regarding the game; a slave control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means; The main control means includes a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a discriminating means that provides a first discriminating result to the player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. A bonus game execution means for executing an advantageous bonus game, and a first output for outputting an establishment signal indicating the establishment of the specific condition to the slave control means based on the establishment of the specific condition during execution of the bonus game. means, a second output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means, and acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. a discrimination information acquisition means; a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information; and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; and a third output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the slave control means is configured to output the discrimination information signal outputted by the first output means to the slave control means before the determination condition is satisfied. signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least a signal, the discrimination result signal outputted by the second outputting means, and the discrimination information signal outputted by the third outputting means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the reception of the result signal; a specific information storage means capable of storing specific information updated in correspondence with the discrimination information; specific information updating means capable of updating the specific information according to the discrimination information; and when the establishment signal is received by the signal receiving means, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated. 1 or 2, which is executed after the end of the bonus game, based on the fact that it is determined by the execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed. A second performance execution means is provided for executing the second performance over a plurality of execution periods of the first performance.

The gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the first output means outputs the establishment signal based on the fulfillment of the condition for ending the bonus game.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the signal receiving means receives the discrimination information signal, the game machine responds to the received discrimination information signal. A reception determining means is provided for determining whether to execute the second performance using the determination result of the determining means.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4, in the gaming machine according to claim 3, the main control means executes the bonus game based on the first determination result obtained by the determination means. The signal receiving means is configured to be able to receive the bonus game execution signal, and the slave control means is configured to output a bonus game execution signal indicating that the bonus game execution signal Restriction state setting means for setting a restriction state in which execution of the determination by the reception time determination means is restricted based on the reception of the bonus game execution signal by the reception means; , and a canceling means for canceling the restricted state.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine according to claim 4 includes first restriction state setting means for setting the restriction state based on the execution determination means determining that the second effect is to be executed. and a second restriction state setting means for setting the restriction state based on the fact that the reception determining means determines that the second performance is to be executed; and second canceling means for canceling the restriction state based on the termination of the restriction state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in the first discrimination result, A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the fact that the specific condition is met during the execution of the bonus game, an establishment signal indicating that the specific condition is met is outputted by the first output means to the slave control means. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is outputted to the slave control means by the second output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A discrimination information signal corresponding to the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is outputted to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied by the third output means. In the slave control means, the establishment signal outputted by the first outputting means, the determination result signal outputted by the second outputting means, and the determination information signal outputted by the third outputting means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance execution means executes a first performance according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. Specific information that is updated in correspondence with the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is stored in the specific information storage means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the specific information is updated by the specific information updating means according to the discrimination information indicated by the received discrimination information signal. When the establishment signal is received by the signal receiving means, the execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. Based on the determination by the execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of one or more first performances executed after the end of the bonus game. The performance is executed.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the establishment signal is outputted by the first output means based on the fulfillment of the condition for ending the bonus game, so that There is an effect that it can be determined whether to execute the second performance using the specific information updated according to the new determination information.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the received discrimination information signal is triggered by the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means. Since the reception determining means determines whether to execute the second performance using the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the above, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second performance can be further increased.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to claim 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, a bonus game execution signal indicating that a bonus game is to be executed is outputted by the fourth output means based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit. The signal receiving means is configured to be able to receive the bonus game execution signal. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the bonus game execution signal by the signal receiving means, the restriction state setting means sets a restriction state in which execution of the determination by the reception time determination means is restricted. The restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means based on the establishment of the specific condition.

As a result, while the bonus game is being executed, the execution of the determination by the reception determining means is avoided until the specific condition is met, so that when the specific condition is met, the execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance. This has the effect of suppressing unnecessary determination by the reception determining means before the reception is received.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to claim 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first restriction state setting means sets the restriction state based on the fact that the execution determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. The restriction state is set by the second restriction state setting means based on the fact that the reception determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed. Based on the completion of the second performance by the second performance means, the second release means releases the restricted state.

This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the reception determining means from repeatedly determining whether to perform the second performance while the second performance has already been executed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the continuous notice performance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the continuous notice performance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, the change over time in the performance mode from when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance when there are two balls on hold until after the continuous preview performance ends and when one variable display is executed. FIG. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a regulation of the variation pattern table for jackpot in the first embodiment. FIG. 6(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) in the form. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. . FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a preview selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of logical sum data generated when a preview lottery prohibition state is canceled in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice performance setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing several command processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is the configuration of the random number range selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 12(c) is a block diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the winning random number range pattern table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the point selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the dependent random number table in the second embodiment. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the selection table for cancellation in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing random number range command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing stop command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the preview performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the value of the high expectation type flag and the expectation level of the lottery result in the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between It is a flowchart showing winning information command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing stop command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice performance setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing the change over time in the lottery state after winning a jackpot. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a cancellation determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of an ending selection table in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the detour accessory in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during the jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 6th embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is closed, and (b) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is open. FIG. (a) is a sectional view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a sectional view showing the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. It is a sectional view showing a completely closed state. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a change over time in the state of the right specific winning hole when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a change over time in the state of the right specific winning hole when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. In the form, it is a diagram schematically showing a change over time in the state of the right specific winning hole 650a when an open pattern in which it is difficult to win a prize is set. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door during one opening period when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of a jackpot in which an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot termination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a 3rd pattern display device in a probability variable state and a time saving state displayed on a 3rd pattern display device in a 7th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulation contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third modification of the seventh embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the game balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that fires game balls to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the content of the super reach performance. Be manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Various performances such as variable performances and reach performances that are performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the variation effect is not being performed or during high-speed variation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage changes from "sandy beach stage" to "deep sea stage". ” → “Sandy Beach Stage” → ... will be changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach effect is to be developed from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect, a selection screen for the performance mode of the super reach effect is displayed during the normal reach effect. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the performance at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate stamp etc. affixed to the pachinko machine 10 (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and the rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the ball lending operation section 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40, so that the component configuration may be the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open top surface for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. ing. On the right side of the lower tray 50, there is provided an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front of the game board 13, and inside the operating handle 51 there is a device that allows driving of the ball firing unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for controlling the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b that stops firing the game ball while the button is pressed, and a variable switch that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 based on changes in electrical resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The game ball is fired with a strength (shooting strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, thereby driving the game ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the lower part of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, and is operated when discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. Game balls naturally fall and are ejected from the bottom opening. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling a ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entering hole 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board 13 through the holes. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (a winning opening, etc. is provided, and a game ball that is fired) is the area where the water flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a situation where a game ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide path again. Prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right corner in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the game ball, and a game ball launched with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 69. , it is bounced back toward the center while its momentum is attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the board 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67. A lottery will be held for the second symbol. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. A determination is also made. When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the special winning slot 65a, which is normally closed, waits for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 game balls win). ) is released, and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols: "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", and after the special game state ends, game bonuses corresponding to these jackpot types will be added as added value after the jackpot ends. value (gaming value) is given to the player.

Furthermore, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while a variable display is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls entered is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown on the display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls remains for the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for the next special symbol will be held, and a variable display will be displayed according to the lottery. is started. Note that the specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a game ball in an attempt to win a prize in the specific winning hole 65a, so many game balls also enter the first ball entering hole 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of balls held in the first ball entrance 64 reaches the maximum (four times).

On the other hand, in the lottery of normal symbols that is performed in response to the passage of the game ball in the normal ball entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64. It becomes easy to do. In other words, when a normal symbol wins, the game ball becomes easier to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol.

In addition, when a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while a variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is It is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal symbol lottery is held, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Begins.

As described above, there are two types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B." When "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" are reached, a special game state with 16 rounds (16R jackpot) occurs. Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability is changing) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next special symbol hits the jackpot. On the other hand, after "Jackpot B" ends, as an added value, the winning probability of normal symbols increases until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols has increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (the probability of special symbols is changing), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot ) is a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in a "high probability state" is called a "special symbol low probability state", and this is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol's variable probability state, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than the normal probability state. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). In addition, "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving state) refers to a game state in which the probability of winning the normal symbol increases and the game ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. . On the other hand, when it is not the ``normal symbol time saving state'', it is called the ``normal symbol normal state'', and this indicates that the probability of winning the normal symbol is normal (a state where the probability of winning is lower than during time saving).

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is the same regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "high probability state of special symbol" is reached after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot. It changes whether it becomes a "time saving state of normal symbols". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for some of the types of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the symbol is in the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state for normal symbols, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 may be lengthened, or the number of times the electric accessory 64a is released in one normal symbol hit may be increased. Also good.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2), there is a first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in a lit state, or if any of the game balls entered into the first ball entry port 64 has not been changed yet. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of certain game balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters the ball will be suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times that the ball is held is not limited to four times, and may be held up to three times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted light colors, various gaming states (high probability states of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be realized with a small number of LEDs. , normal symbol time saving, etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and if it is a jackpot, it will be displayed according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the gaming area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, from which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 configured with an LED. . A center frame 86 is disposed in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to execute a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the game state on the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display will be made accordingly. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. The pattern, which is a type of pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81, consists of nine types of main patterns, each numbered from "1" to "9", and a sub-symbol consisting of a shell-shaped pattern. It is configured. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is configured so that the jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with approximately 5/6 of the upper portion being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is variably displayed; The lower one-sixth of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays a reserved pitch number symbol indicating the number of reserved pitches, a preview character, and the like.

On the display screen (display area) of the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, an interrupted row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display regions. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols, 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in the main display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is now possible to do so. Further, five effective lines are set on the display screen, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5 (see FIG. 4(a)). Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3, middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line. ~ When the variable display of Z3 ends, it is assumed that a jackpot has occurred, and a jackpot video is displayed.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols." When "Jackpot B" which is a 16R normal jackpot occurs, a combination of the same normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "variable probability symbols". When a combination of the same variable probability symbols is stopped and displayed, a "jackpot A" which is a 16R variable probability jackpot occurs. In addition, in some cases where "Jackpot A" occurs, a combination of the same normal symbols is once stopped and displayed, and then a production (so-called promotion production) in which the normal symbol is changed to a variable probability symbol is executed. Ru. Thereby, even when the normal symbols are aligned (or are likely to be aligned), the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for a probability-variable jackpot.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of the fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each symbol row. The number of symbols etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the symbols.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 while a variable display is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters the first prize hole 64 is up to four times. The number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. In the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number symbol ("○" symbol) is displayed for each reserved pitch number, and according to the displayed number of reserved pitches, The number of pitches will be displayed. That is, when one pending ball number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of pending pitches is one, and when four pending pitch number symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of pending pitches is one. Indicates that the number of pitches is 4. Further, when the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0 balls, that is, there are no reserved balls. The example of FIG. 4(b) shows an example in which two reserved balls number symbols are displayed, indicating that the number of reserved balls is two.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the first prize opening 64 is configured to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls can be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed for the number of reserved balls. The display may be made in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a continuous preview effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, will be explained. The continuous preview performance is a performance in which the same system of preview performance is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays. It is determined whether or not this continuous notice performance can be executed when a new starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, it is executed over a variable display based on the reserved balls that are being held at the time when a new starting winning is detected, and a changing display based on the new starting winning. Although the details will be described later, the percentage of successive preview performances will be higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the lottery result of a new starting prize. Therefore, when the continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about a big win.

FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a variable display performed based on a held ball other than the last held ball to be executed among held balls for which a continuous preview effect is set. be. FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2 is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 5(a), during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the third symbols with the same numbers attached to the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 5(a), the main symbols numbered "3" are displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row Z1 and on the right side of the lower symbol row Z2, respectively. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the main symbols to which the same numbers are attached are displayed in a manner in which the surroundings thereof emit light (a manner different from that of the other third symbols). Thereby, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the continuous preview performance is being executed. Hereinafter, the mode in which the surroundings of the main symbol emit light will be referred to as "the mode wrapped in an aura."

As shown in FIG. 5(b), during the execution of the continuous preview performance, even if the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the number "3" in the middle symbol row Z2 is It is displayed in a stopped state surrounded by an aura. As a result, even though the displayed combination of symbols is a winning combination, expectations for a jackpot (the lottery result corresponding to a jackpot is included in the reserved balls) are improved. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display mode when the last variable display in the continuous preview performance is being executed. As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the last variable display of the continuous preview performance, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same number is displayed on either active line. The main symbol that has been displayed is stopped and displayed, and the main symbol that has the same number is displayed in an aura-like manner. In the example of FIG. 6(a), a case is illustrated in which main symbols numbered "3" are each stopped and displayed on the active line L4. This state in which one symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is changing and the main symbols with the same number on the active line are stopped and displayed is called a reach state. Note that the first embodiment is configured such that a ready-to-win state always occurs in the final variable display of the continuous preview performance. That is, the configuration is such that only when a new starting prize is a lottery result corresponding to a fluctuating display accompanied by a ready-to-win state, it can be determined that the continuous preview performance starts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player aware that at least a reach state will occur after the start of the continuous preview performance, thereby increasing the player's expectations for a jackpot. can.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), when the reach state occurs, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR1 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, and a message "Reach!!!" is displayed for the display area HR1. ' will be displayed. The content displayed in the display area HR1 allows the player to more easily understand that a ready-to-reach state has occurred.

FIG. 6(b) shows an example of a display mode when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a stopped state in the final variable display of the continuous preview performance and a jackpot is announced. When a jackpot is announced in the continuous preview performance, the main symbols with the same number as the main symbol with an aura, which are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, have already been The main symbol that is being stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the active line where it is placed. In other words, an effect is performed in which the main symbols with the same number and surrounded by an aura are aligned on one active line. FIG. 6(b) illustrates a case where the main symbols numbered "3" are aligned on the active line L4. By aligning three main symbols with the same number on the active line, the player can easily understand that he has won a jackpot. Note that in the display area HR1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, the words "Congratulations!!" are displayed to congratulate you on hitting the jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to give a greater sense of satisfaction to the player.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in each variable display in which a continuous notice effect is set, the main symbols that are stopped and displayed while wrapped in an aura are configured so that they all have the same number attached to them. There is. In other words, in the first variation display of a continuous preview performance, if the main symbol with the number "3" is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 with an aura, the second and subsequent variations In the display as well, three main symbols with the number "3" attached are stopped and displayed in a state covered with an aura. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the manner of each variable display in one continuous preview performance.

In addition, although illustrations have been omitted, there are multiple preview effects that are executed in each variable display where a continuous preview effect is set, in addition to the effect in which the stop symbol is changed to an aura (notice effect A). exist. Specifically, when the fluctuations of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stop, the main symbols with the same numbers freeze (preview effect B), and the main symbols with the same numbers are struck by lightning. At least a continuous preview performance (preview performance C) is provided as a type of continuous preview performance. The preview performance C is the type with the highest expectation of a jackpot, and the preview performance A is the type with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. Further, the expectation level for the preview performance B is set to be higher than the preview performance A and lower than the preview performance C. In this way, by varying the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the type of continuous preview performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of continuous preview performance and play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode when continuous preview performance is set. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing how the performance mode changes over time in a case where a new starting prize is detected and a continuous preview performance is determined in a state where two reserved balls are present.

As shown in Figure 7, when a starting prize (winner A in the upper left of Figure 7) is detected during the execution of a normal (that is, continuous notice effect is not set) variable display in a state where two reserved balls are present. , a determination is made as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. If it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance based on the judgment based on winning A, the fluctuating display based on the two pending balls held at that time and the fluctuating display based on winning A will be displayed continuously over the fluctuating time. Set the preview performance to be executed. More specifically, the value of the preview count counter 223i indicating the remaining number of continuous preview performances is set to 3, which is the number of times the continuous preview performances are executed, and the determined type of continuous preview performances (notices A to C) is set. The value of the advance notice type flag 223k is updated according to either of the following. As a result, the continuous preview performance is started from the next variable display (fluctuating display based on the oldest suspended ball held at the time when execution of the continuous preview performance was decided).

Further, in the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, a state is set in which the lottery of the continuous preview performance is prohibited (hereinafter referred to as a preview lottery prohibited state). This is to prevent (suppress) continuous preview performances from being determined redundantly while the continuous preview performances are being executed. To be more specific, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the detection of a new starting prize even during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the type of the preview performance may be changed during the continuous preview performance. There is a possibility that it will be switched. For example, during the execution of a continuous preview performance for which preview performance B is set, a new starting prize is detected and it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, and if the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, then the preview performance B There is a risk that the preview performance A will be canceled and the next change will be switched to the preview performance A. In other words, the player may be disappointed by switching from a performance type (notice performance B) with relatively high expectations to a performance type (notice performance A) with low expectations. In addition, if a continuous preview performance of the same performance type is newly determined during the execution of a continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance will be continuously displayed for a number of times that is equal to or greater than the number of suspended balls that were held at the start of the continuous preview performance. A preview performance will be performed. As a result, it may become difficult for the player to understand which reserved balls he should have high expectations for, and the meaning of the performance may become difficult to understand.

In addition, as a method to solve these problems, only when a starting winning corresponding to a jackpot is detected during the execution of a continuous notice performance that ultimately loses, it is possible to judge whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed. In addition, a method may be considered in which the performance type of the continuous preview performance that is additionally determined has a level of expectation higher than the performance type of the continuous preview performance that is currently being executed. However, in this case, each time a starting prize is detected during the execution of a continuous preview performance, it is necessary to perform control processing to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance and the type of notice by determining multiple conditions. , there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, after the execution of the continuous notice performance is decided, and after the end of the continuous notice performance, a variable display (first detected in the state where the notice lottery is prohibited) is displayed. The configuration is such that it is prohibited to newly determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed until the end of the variable display based on the winning prize B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance type from switching during the execution of the continuous preview performance, or to prevent the continuous preview performance from continuing beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the continuous preview performance. Furthermore, at the time of starting winning, it is determined whether or not the preview lottery is prohibited (whether or not a preview performance prohibition flag 223h, which will be described later, is on), and if the preview lottery is prohibited, it is determined whether or not continuous preview performances can be executed. Since it is sufficient to perform simple control such as skipping the determination process, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-mentioned preview lottery prohibition state is set during execution of the three variable displays in which the continuous preview performance is set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, when a starting prize is detected during the execution of the second or third variable display of a continuous preview performance, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance for the starting winning is performed. is skipped. In addition, the preview lottery prohibited state continues during the execution period of the first fluctuating display after the end of the continuous preview performance, and when the first fluctuating display ends after the end of the continuous preview performance, the preview lottery is prohibited. The prohibited state is lifted. Therefore, if a new starting prize is detected during the execution of the first variable display after the continuous previewing performance ends, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous previewing performance for the starting winning will be performed as follows: It will be skipped as if it were running. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous preview performance from starting again immediately after the end of the continuous preview performance and continuing the continuous preview performance endlessly. If the continuous preview performance is allowed to be set from the first variable display executed after the continuous preview performance ends, the variable display based on the starting prize that triggered the start of execution of the first continuous preview performance will end. Even after this, the performance becomes as if the continuous preview performance continues. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not know on what basis the continuous preview performance was started, and there is a possibility that the meaning of the continuous preview performance may be misunderstood. In other words, the continuous preview performance is not executed based on the lottery result (variation type) read in advance at the time of winning the start, but is simply a performance that changes the performance mode over a fixed number of variable displays. There is a risk of misunderstanding. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, after the continuous preview performance ends, at least one variable display can be performed in a normal mode (a mode without a preview performance). The player can easily understand whether the game has ended or not. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand which variable display to be performed (which number of reserved balls) to have a feeling of anticipation during the execution of the continuous preview performance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the lottery results of all the reserved balls that are being reserved at that time are determined, and the determined result is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. The details of the determination method will be described later, but by taking into consideration the lottery results of all reserved balls and determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, even if the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved, It is possible to suppress the execution of continuous preview performances from being set based on reserved balls with low expectations.

In other words, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed in order from the parked balls whose starting winnings are detected to be the oldest in terms of time, then the continuous preview performance will be performed without determining the temporally newest parked balls. may be determined. In this case, the held balls for which the continuous preview performance has been decided are lottery results with relatively low expectations (for example, held balls that lose after normal reach), and the held balls that are new in time have high expectations. If a ball with a high level of hold (for example, a ball with a super reach that results in a jackpot) is included, even though a continuous preview effect is set for the ball with a low level of expectation, the level of expectation There is a possibility that a situation may arise in which a continuous preview effect is not set for a ball with a high holding pitch. Therefore, there is a possibility that expectations for the continuous preview performance will be lost.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined in order from the temporally newest pending ball at the timing when the starting prize is detected, the continuous preview performance is determined without determining the temporally oldest pending ball. There is a possibility that the production will be decided. In this case, the held balls for which the continuous preview performance has been decided are lottery results with relatively low expectations (for example, held balls that lose after normal reach), and the held balls that are older in time have high expectations. If there are highly held balls (for example, a held ball that becomes a jackpot due to a super reach), the continuous preview performance will not end with the held balls with high expectations that are executed first, and the expectation level will increase. The continuous preview performance continues until the variable display based on the low number of held balls. That is, there is a risk that the player may be left with the impression that the continuous preview presentation has become boring.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance by taking into consideration the lottery results of all the reserved balls. It is possible to set a continuous preview performance that continues until the lottery result with the highest expectation level. Therefore, even though a continuous preview effect is set for a held ball with low expectations, a continuous preview effect may not be set for a held ball with high expectations, or a continuous preview effect is set for a held ball with high expectations in the middle of a continuous preview effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball is consumed and a held ball with low expectations is consumed in the last variable display of a continuous preview performance. Therefore, continuous preview effects can be suitably executed.

In the first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibited state is set from the time when it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, after the end of the continuous notice performance, until the end of the first variable display. However, it is not limited to this. The conditions for canceling the preview lottery prohibited state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the number of variable displays during which the preview lottery prohibited state is set may be increased (for example, to 5 times). With this configuration, more normal modes (modes that do not involve a preview effect) can be displayed fluctuating between the end of one continuous preview effect and the start of the next continuous preview effect. Since this can be executed, it is possible to more reliably make the player recognize whether one continuous preview performance has ended or not. Furthermore, as the number of variable displays in which the preview lottery prohibition state is set increases, the chances of determining a continuous preview performance decrease, so that the rarity of the continuous preview performance can be increased. Therefore, just by starting the continuous preview performance, the player can be made to feel that he or she has seen an unusual performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the cancellation condition for the preview lottery prohibited state was specified by the number of variable displays (from the end of the continuous preview presentation until the end of one variable display), but the cancellation condition is It is not necessarily limited to the number of fluctuating displays. For example, the cancellation condition may be determined based on the elapsed time after the end of the continuous preview performance. More specifically, the preview lottery prohibition state may be canceled when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the continuous preview performance ends. With this configuration, even if a player ends the game at the end of the continuous preview performance, if the next player starts playing after a predetermined period of time, the preview lottery prohibited state will be lifted. It is possible to have the player play the game while the player is in the same state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a successor player starts playing a game in a state in which the advance notice lottery is prohibited, thereby making continuous advance notice effects more enjoyable.

In the first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibited state is set after the continuous preview performance ends until the end of one fluctuating display, but the preview lottery is prohibited immediately after the continuous preview performance ends. It may also be configured to cancel the lottery prohibition state. In this case, it may be configured such that the player can easily identify whether or not this is the last fluctuating display of the continuous preview performance based on the performance mode. With this configuration, it is possible to further shorten the period during which the preview lottery prohibited state is set, and therefore it is possible to further increase the chances of performing continuous preview performances. In addition, as a specific example of the performance mode indicating whether or not this is the last variable display of the continuous preview performance, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of fluctuations of the continuous preview performance is displayed in a countdown manner. In addition, it may be configured to display a display indicating the end (for example, the word "end") in the final variable display, or the same song may be played continuously during the continuous preview performance, and the continuous preview performance The music may be stopped at the timing when the last variable display ends. Further, during the execution of the continuous notice performance, a configuration may be adopted in which the ready-to-reach state does not occur in the third symbol display device 81 in variable displays other than the last variable display. That is, during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the ready-to-win state may be displayed to indicate that this is the last variable display of the continuous preview performance.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a regular symbol lottery is being executed as the game ball passes through the regular ball entrance 67. A normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation ends.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the game ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67, the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened), and as a result, a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the game ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and is also displayed by lighting on the second pattern holding lamp 84. Ru. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the variable display of the normal symbols (second symbols) can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as is the case with the first ball entrance 64, but may be 3 or less, or 5 or more times. (For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 into which game balls can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first ball entry port 64 also serves as one of the winning ports from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entry hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 results in a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined period of time (variable time) has elapsed so that the jackpot symbol is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds pass or until 10 game balls are won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win or are difficult to win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal state. It operates by alternately repeating the closed state and the closed state.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A special gaming state is a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed as follows.

At the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a are guided to a ball ejection path (not shown) through an out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a device used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or try to forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and pays out game balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). We are prepared. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later, is stored. The details will be described later together with the explanation of the first winning random number counter C1, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is one of the judgment values specified in the first winning random number table 202a. If it matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. It is defined in relation to Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the jackpot A is defined in association with it (see 202b1 in FIG. 9(b)). Furthermore, the range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" is associated with and defined as jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 9(c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol is It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the explanation of the variation type counter CS1.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 21), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 29). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance 64, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and game balls are stored in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through either the right or left normal entry gate (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and the special symbol is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203a. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set as follows. If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). It is divided into two types: one for the period when the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the special symbol lottery are set. Specifically, when the probability of the special symbol is variable, it is determined in the lottery of the special symbol whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 9" and "0 to 9" is determined. 9", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Among the 400 values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, from 0 to 399, there are 10 values from 0 to 9, which determine a jackpot. The probability of this is 1/40 (10/400). In addition, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Among the 400 values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take from "0 to 399", there is only one judgment value of "0" that becomes a jackpot, so when the special symbol is in a low probability state, The probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/400.

In addition, in this embodiment, the random numbers that result in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability times and the random numbers that result in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability times are used. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for a jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be inputted from the outside and that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value for a jackpot is changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state). By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the event of a special symbol jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entry hole 64. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a miss of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is missed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, then the value corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode will be the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 9(b), in this first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type becomes "jackpot A" (Fig. 9 (See 202b1 in (b)). Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(c)). In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that two types of winnings (Jackpot A, Jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. .

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, 98, 99), which stops at the reach, and ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected, including a "completely off" (range of 0 to 89, for example) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front and back off reach" becomes narrow to 98 and 99, and the "front and back off reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making it difficult for "front and back off reach" and "front and back off reach" to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the entry time of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79, which is a low probability state. The table for the time is selected, making it difficult for "completely off" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front/back off" is wide from 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front/back off". Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long performance times can be performed, so the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can continue. It becomes easier to perform. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "front/back off reach" is set to 98 and 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode of so-called normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

Here, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10(a) to 10(d). As shown in FIG. 10(a), this variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10(b)) and a loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(c)). ) and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10(d)) are set at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 10(b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with various normal reach (30 seconds) fluctuation patterns, and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various types of super reach. (60 seconds) fluctuation patterns are associated with the range "180 to 198", and various special reach (90 seconds) fluctuation patterns are associated with the range "180 to 198". When selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a loss in a special symbol low probability state. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as mentioned above, the stop type is determined from the stop type selection table (not shown) as whether it is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set as a complete miss, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is set as a miss reach. (Reach off front and back, reach other than off back and forth).

Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete error, either a short error (7 seconds), which has a relatively short variation time, or a long error (10 seconds), which has a relatively long variation time, is set. The determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 98" for short misses (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" for long misses (10 seconds).

In addition, for out-of-reach reaches, if the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", there are various kinds of out-of-reach normal reaches (30 seconds), and in the range of "150 to 197", out-of-reach types of super reaches. (60 seconds), but "198" has various special reaches (90 seconds) set.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the normal gaming state, and changes the variation obtained from the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery is a loss in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In this deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-mentioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

As mentioned above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete failure is determined. , if it is in the range of "90 to 99", an off reach (front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off) is determined.

In this way, when the game is in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is a miss is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that when the probability changes, the fluctuation time of a loss becomes long, and the period until a jackpot is reached becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is delayed during the variable probability game state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 11, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the right or left normal ball entry gate (through gate) 67. It is acquired when the ball is held and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is set by the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is determined by the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this second winning random number table is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state), and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for short-time periods and one for short-time periods, and the number of random numbers that become jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 9(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (FIG. 9(c) ), see 202c1). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbols. A fluctuating display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x once". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once". , the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbols. A fluctuating display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ) and the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared to when the probability of the normal symbol is low, the time of the variable display is extremely shortened from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the first ball entry port 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 29).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including the time when a power outage occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 28). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable flag. 203e and a time saving counter 203f.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1. , a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (first area to fourth reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reservation area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. is moved (moved), and based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the jackpot of the original special symbol is hit. Apart from the lottery, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is held, various information that would be obtained when the original lottery was held is calculated based on the data corresponding to the starting winnings (values of each counter C1 to C3). Hereinafter, prediction will be described as pre-reading the lottery results of special symbols. Note that the various information includes validity, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223 as winning information. 223a. Further, if the preview lottery is not prohibited, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on various information notified by the winning information command.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

Furthermore, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so similar to the case of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas are A shift process is performed in which the data is packed into a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c displays a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the value reaches the maximum value of 4. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times N of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S405 in FIG. 24). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the number of held balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the number of held balls command sent from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol held ball counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the pitch, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on hold for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d calculates the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol held ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S505 in FIG. 25).

When the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol held ball number counter 203d (the number of held times M of variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second winning random number The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. No (S603 in FIG. 26: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special probability variation state. This indicates that the probability of the symbol is changing, and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203e is initially set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery, it is set to off when setting the start of the jackpot (see S213 in FIG. 22).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if its state is on, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for high probability times, while the state of the probability variation flag 203e If is off, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for low probability times (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 23).

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this time saving medium counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110 and a jackpot B is achieved, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 30). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

When a winning lottery with a normal symbol is held, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more or the state of the probability change flag 203e is on. If so, it is determined that the normal symbol is time-saving. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability winning (see S509 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and based on the second random number table for low probability winnings, A lottery of normal symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 25).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the solenoid 209, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and controls to these via the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the game ball. be. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and continuous preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Here, details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. First, FIG. 12(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a preview selection table 222b.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. It will be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, the preview effect setting process, which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36), is performed. (See FIG. 37), one variation pattern (detailed display mode of variation effect) is determined (specified) from among the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a (see S4603 and S4605 of FIG. 37). In the variation pattern defined in this variation pattern table 222a, information including the presence or absence of a preview performance and the type of preview performance is defined.

The preview selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute continuous preview effects. The details of this advance notice selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this advance notice selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 13, the preview selection table 222b is a data table that defines the range of random numbers (values of the performance lottery counter 223f) for determining each of the preview performances A to C for each variation type. When determining whether or not to execute continuous preview performances, if the value of the performance lottery counter 223f belongs to any of the ranges of random numbers (values of the performance lottery counter 223f) associated with each preview performance, , it is decided to execute a continuous preview performance of the performance type associated with the range. On the other hand, if the value of the performance lottery counter 223f does not belong to any of the random value ranges defined in the preview selection table 222b, it is determined not to perform the continuous preview performance.

This notice selection table 222b defines six types of fluctuations: special reach hit, super reach hit, normal reach hit, special reach out, super reach out, and normal reach out. Other types of fluctuations (long deviation, short deviation) are not stipulated and therefore are not subject to the determination of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. By limiting the objects on which the continuous notice performance can be executed to the variation type in which a ready-to-reach state occurs, it is guaranteed that at least the ready-to-reach state will develop when the continuous notice performance is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is special reach, the "notice performance A" is associated with the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (the value of the performance lottery counter 223f). "Notice performance B" is defined in association with the range of 35 random numbers from "10 to 44" (the value of the performance lottery counter 223f), and 15 random numbers from "45 to 59". "Notice performance C" is defined in association with the range (value of performance lottery counter 223f) (see 222b1 in FIG. 13). The performance lottery counter 223f is updated within the range of 100 values from "0 to 99", so when the variation type is special reach, the percentage of "notice performance A" being determined is 10% (10/ 100), the proportion at which "preview effect B" is determined is 35% (35/100), and the proportion at which "preview effect C" is determined is 15% (15/100). Furthermore, the rate at which continuous preview performances are not determined is 40% (40/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is super reach, "notice effect A" corresponds to the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (value of the effect lottery counter 223f). "Notice performance B" is defined in association with the range of 30 random numbers (value of the performance lottery counter 223f) from "10 to 39", and 10 random numbers from "40 to 49" are defined. A "notice presentation C" is defined in association with a range of random numbers (value of the presentation lottery counter 223f) (see 222b2 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per super reach, the percentage of "preview effect A" being determined is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of "preview effect B" being determined is 30% (30/100). ), and the rate at which "preview effect C" is determined is 10% (10/100). Furthermore, the rate at which continuous preview performances are not determined is 50% (50/100). That is, the rate at which continuous preview performances are determined is lower than in the case of special reach. Furthermore, when continuous preview performances are executed, the rate at which the preview performance A is determined is higher than the special reach hit, while the rate at which the preview performance C is determined is lower.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is normal reach, "notice performance A" is associated with the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (value of the performance lottery counter 223f). "Notice performance B" is defined in association with the range of 15 random numbers from "10 to 24" (value of the performance lottery counter 223f), and five random numbers from "25 to 29" are defined. A "notice presentation C" is defined in association with a range of numerical values (value of the presentation lottery counter 223f) (see 222b3 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per normal reach, the percentage of "notice effect A" being determined is 10% (10/100), and the rate of determining "notice effect B" is 15% (15/100). , and the rate at which "preview effect C" is determined is 5% (5/100). Furthermore, the rate at which continuous preview performances are not determined is 70% (70/100). That is, the rate at which continuous preview performances are determined is lower than in the case of special reach or super reach. Furthermore, when continuous preview performances are executed, the rate at which the preview performance A is determined is higher than the special reach hit or the super reach hit, while the rate at which the preview performance C is determined is lower.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, if the variation type is out of special reach, "notice effect A" corresponds to the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (value of the effect lottery counter 223f). "Notice performance B" is defined in association with the range of eight random numbers "10 to 17" (value of the performance lottery counter 223f), and two random numbers "18, 19" are defined. A "notice presentation C" is defined in association with a range of random numbers (value of the presentation lottery counter 223f) (see 222b4 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of special reach, the proportion that "notice effect A" is decided is 10% (10/100), and the proportion that "notice effect B" is decided is 8% (8/100). ), and the rate at which "preview effect C" is determined is 2% (2/100). Further, the rate at which continuous preview performances are not determined is 80% (80/100). That is, the rate at which continuous preview performances are determined is lower than in the case of special reach, super reach, and normal reach. In addition, when continuous preview effects are executed, the percentage of preview effects A being determined is higher than per special reach, super reach, and normal reach, while the proportion of preview effects B and C being determined is low. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, if the variation type is out of super reach, "notice effect A" corresponds to the range of nine random numbers from "0 to 8" (value of the effect lottery counter 223f). "Notice performance B" is defined in association with one random number value (value of performance lottery counter 223f) "9" (see 222b5 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of super reach, the percentage that "notice effect A" is determined is 9% (9/100), and the percentage that "notice effect B" is determined is 1% (1/100). ), on the other hand, there is no possibility that "preview performance C" will be determined. Furthermore, the rate at which continuous preview performances are not determined is 90% (90/100). That is, the rate at which continuous preview performances are determined is lower than in the cases of special reach, super reach, normal reach, and special reach. In addition, when continuous preview effects are executed, the percentage of preview effects A being determined is higher than special reach hits, super reach hits, normal reach hits, and special reach misses, while the preview effects B are determined. The percentage will be lower. Furthermore, the possibility that the preview performance C will be determined is 0.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, if the variation type is out of normal reach, "notice effect A" is associated with the range of five random numbers from "0 to 4" (value of the effect lottery counter 223f). (See 222b6 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of the special reach, the probability that "notice presentation A" is determined is 5% (5/100), while there is no possibility that notice presentations B and C are determined. Furthermore, the rate at which continuous preview performances are not determined is 95% (95/100). That is, the rate at which continuous preview performances are determined is lower than for other variation types that are subject to determination as to whether or not continuous preview performances can be executed. Furthermore, when continuous preview effects are executed, the probability that preview effects A will be determined is higher than other variation types, while the probability that preview effects B and C will be determined is zero.

In this way, the first embodiment is configured such that the rate of determining continuous preview effects is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Further, the variation type with a high expectation level (long variation time) is configured to have a higher rate of determining continuous preview performance than the variation type with a low expectation level (short variation time). Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's expectation of a jackpot at the time when execution of the continuous preview performance is started.

In addition, in the first embodiment, for variation types with high expectations, the proportion of preview effects A is determined is lower than for variation types with low expectations, while the proportion of preview effects C is determined. is configured so that it is high. Therefore, when preview performance C is started, the player can be strongly expected to win the jackpot, while when preview performance A is started, the last change in the continuous preview performance You can watch the performance with a sense of tension until it is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the type of preview performance.

In addition, the preview performance B is configured so that it will not be selected (determined) if it is out of the normal reach, so at the time the preview performance B starts, it will develop to a super reach or higher (out of the super reach, out of the special reach), or it will become a jackpot. That is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about winning the jackpot. Furthermore, since the preview performance C is configured not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is off or the super reach is off, it is certain that the preview performance C will develop into a special reach or become a jackpot at the time the preview performance C is started. Therefore, when the preview performance C is started, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of winning the jackpot.

Next, details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). FIG. 12(b) is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a fluctuation A time counter 223e, a performance lottery counter 223f, a game state storage area 223g, a preview performance prohibition flag 223h, a notice frequency counter 223i, a notice prohibition release flag 223j, a notice type flag 223k, and an other memory area 223z. At least it is provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning is detected in the main control device 110, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is , is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and converts the winning information into the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is determined in order from the areas with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four vacant areas (1st pending area to 4th pending area). is memorized. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time. In other words, the first to fourth reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a are the counters stored in the first to fourth reserved areas in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the main controller 110, respectively. Data corresponding to the lottery result based on the value is stored.

In addition, in the audio lamp control device 113, when various information based on a new starting prize is notified by the winning information command, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance based on the various information. That is, based on the notified various information and the value of the performance lottery counter 223f, whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance and the performance type of the continuous preview performance are determined with reference to the above-mentioned preview selection table 222b. By executing the continuous preview performance, it is possible to continuously create a sense of expectation for a jackpot over a plurality of fluctuating displays, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, a preview lottery prohibition state is set that prohibits determination of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. Then, when the preview lottery prohibited state ends, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the information stored in all areas of the winning information storage area 223a. In addition, when performing a continuous preview performance, it is also determined which of the reserved balls the continuous preview performance is to be continued. A method of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance, which is executed based on the end of the preview lottery prohibited state, will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 14.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining part of the control process that is executed with reference to information in each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the preview lottery prohibited state is ended (cancelled). As shown within the horizontally elongated substantially rectangular broken line in FIG. 14, each area of the winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store 1 byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in FIG. 14, each bit of the 1-byte data is associated with a variation type, and the ON bit indicates the variation type of winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, in order from the upper bit, "special reach hit", "super reach hit", "normal reach hit", "special reach missed", "super reach missed", "normal reach missed" ”, “Long off”, and “Short off” are associated with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the second bit of the first pending area is 1 (on) and the other bits are off, so the "length off" associated with the second bit is This is the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data stored in the area. Similarly, in the pending second area of the winning information storage area 223a, the 5th bit associated with "Special Reach Missing" is set to 1 (on), so the lottery indicated by the data in the pending second area The result (variation type) is "Out of special reach". Similarly, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the second pending area is "short miss", and the lottery result (variable type) indicated by the data in the third pending area is "super reach". Note that the data in the execution area is not used for this control, and is therefore not shown.

When the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled, as shown in FIG. 14, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each reservation area except the first reservation area is calculated. Logical sum is a logic in which if at least one data among multiple data is true (1), the result is true (1), and if all of the multiple data are false (0), the result is false (0). It is an operation. In the example of FIG. 14, data "010100" is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reason why the first hold area is excluded is that the continuous preview performance in the first embodiment is configured to be executed over at least two variable displays. In other words, if the first pending area is used as a target for determining whether or not to execute a continuous preview effect, a continuous preview effect may be set only for one variable display based on the data of the first pending area. The purpose is to prevent (suppress) this.

In the first embodiment, based on the generated logical sum data, the highest expectation level (priority for determining whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed) is determined among the data stored in each pending area of the winning information storage area 223a. Identify the data that corresponds to a ball with a high value. More specifically, the logical sum data indicates that the higher the bit, the higher the expectation level, the data corresponding to the reserved ball, so it is possible to determine whether there is a bit that is on (1) in the logical sum data. It is determined whether or not the bit is on from the upper bit side, and when an on bit is detected, a continuous preview effect is executed from the value of the preview selection table 222b and the effect lottery counter 223f based on the variation type corresponding to the bit. Execute a lottery to decide whether to accept or not. Then, if it is determined that a continuous preview performance will be performed, a reserved area is searched for where the bit corresponding to the same expectation level (variation type) as the on (1) bit of the logical sum data is on (1). Then, a continuous preview performance is set that continues until the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved area where the same bit as the OR data is turned on.

In this way, in the first embodiment, when the preview lottery prohibited state is lifted, the logical sum data is generated based on the data in all the pending areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. With this configuration, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case where it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance after checking the details of the data of all the holding areas. can. More specifically, for example, in the case where all the reserved balls are off long or short (i.e., a lottery result that is not subject to the determination of whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed), in the first embodiment, the logical Since all bits of the sum data become 0, the process can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of determining each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Furthermore, for example, even if there are multiple reserved balls to be judged as to whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed, if the judgment is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit that is set to data 1 is judged. Therefore, it is possible to easily specify the variation type with the highest expectation level (priority for determining whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed) among the pending events. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to perform a process of determining each bit of all the reservation areas and specifying the variation type with the highest expectation level among the plurality of variation types to be determined as to whether or not continuous notice performance can be executed. Therefore, processing load can be reduced.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is used in the variable performance (fluctuating display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, and It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4208 in FIG. 33). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of held pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays the number of reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 36). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 32) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 33), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4508 in FIG. 36). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command (see S4510 in FIG. 36).

The fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting fluctuation time. This fluctuation time counter is set with a fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation display, and is updated every time the main processing (see Figure 32) is executed, for example. be done. This fluctuation time counter 223e allows the audio lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display executed in the main control device 110. Therefore, the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol on the first display device 37 and the variation time of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be matched.

The performance lottery counter 223f is a counter used for lottery of production modes, such as determination (lottery) of whether or not continuous preview performances can be executed. This performance lottery counter 223f is. The value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". When a continuous preview performance is to be drawn, the continuous preview performance is determined by referring to the preview type corresponding to the value of the performance lottery counter 223f from the preview selection table 222b.

The gaming state storage area 223g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. This gaming state storage area 223g is updated every time a state command is received from the main controller 110, which is output every time there is a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 33). Note that the game state storage area 223g is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the symbol is in a time saving state, and the second lower bit indicates whether or not it is in a probability variable state of a special symbol. The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223g.

The preview performance prohibition flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the preview lottery is prohibited. If the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on, it means that the preview lottery is prohibited. On the other hand, if the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is off, it means that the preview lottery is not prohibited. While this preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on, determination (lottery) as to whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed is prohibited. This preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON when the determination (lottery) as to whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed is won (see S4311 in FIG. 34 and S4415 in FIG. 35). Further, this preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to OFF when the fluctuation of the normal (i.e., not accompanied by a preview performance) fluctuation display that is executed for the first time after the end of the continuous preview performance is stopped (S4402 in FIG. 35). reference).

The preview number counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of remaining variable displays of the continuous preview performance. This advance notice count counter 223i is set to a value corresponding to the number of consecutive notice performances to be executed when it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance (see S4310 in FIG. 34 and S4414 in FIG. 35). Further, while the value of the advance notice counter 223i is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 each time it is time to start a new variable display (see S4604 in FIG. 37).

The advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the first variable display is being executed after the continuous advance notice performance has ended. That is, this is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display is being executed in which the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled after the change. If this notice prohibition release flag 223j is on, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the continuous notice effect is finished, and if it is off, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the continuous notice effect is finished. This means that the state is other than that in which the fluctuation display is being executed. This advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON at the start of the first variable display after the continuous advance notice performance ends (see S4607 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, this advance notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is set to OFF when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

The preview type flag 223k is a flag indicating the type of continuous preview performance, and is assigned a 3-bit storage area, for example. The first bit corresponds to preview performance A, the second bit corresponds to preview performance B, and the third bit corresponds to preview performance C, indicating that the preview performance corresponding to the on (1) bit is set. Further, when all bits are off (0), it means that the continuous preview effect is not set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 33) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This is used to control the performance (performance) and continuous preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be brought into a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 38).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 16(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the display control device 114 as shown in FIG. 16(b). As shown in FIG. 16(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 16(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 16 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 16 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Furthermore, when the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16(b) and 16(c) are alternately drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 17B shows a back surface A corresponding to the "sandy beach stage" and a back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 17, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Sandy Beach Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed. By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between position a and position b, is for permanent use. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image data can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone as time passes. It can be displayed. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 4), numbered from "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

Further, image data corresponding to main symbols to which numbers "1" to "9" are not attached is also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "woman" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is permanently resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead changes the character design from the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is determined by whether to display either the back surface A or B that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (either "Sandy Beach Stage" or "Deep Sea Stage"), or to display a back surface that is different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol has a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 19 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 16(a) to 16(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 38). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 49(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 40(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 49(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 40(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 46) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 20), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 40(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 46). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 50). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 50). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 51).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 40(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the control processing of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 30. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, 399, 99, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). A starting winning process is executed when the ball enters the entrance 64 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and as the game ball passes through the normal entry ball opening 67, it passes through the through gate. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times N of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is turned on. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S212). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is reset to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213), and the start of the jackpot is set. (S214), the process moves to S217. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. be done. As a result, a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S215), If the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S216), and the process moves to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process moves to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating the stop of variation of the special symbol is set (S217), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is executed in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance that will be played.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current state is a special symbol probability variation state (whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on) (S302). The variable probability flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with a special symbol.If the variable probability flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with a special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) with special symbols.

If it is determined that the special symbol is in a variable probability state (the probability variable flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of the special symbol, so the first winning random number obtained in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for high probability winnings, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, 10 random numbers from 0 to 9 are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the variable probability state (the probability variable flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol. , based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability times. Only "0" is set as the random number value for a special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches "0", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the first winning type selection table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (jackpot A , jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 9(b)), and "50 99'', it is determined to be a jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), as described above. When the process of S307 is completed, the process moves to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S305: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as whether it is a front-to-back off reach, a front-to-back off reach, or a complete off-reach.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and back is set, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability times. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach is set other than front and back off, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S308, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), normal reach, Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as super reach. When the process of S309 ends, the process moves to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 (S310 ). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S306 or S308 (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 29). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (winning) is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (winning) (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an award to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the success or failure of the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a jackpot or not), its stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

After the process of S407 predicts the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type), and the fluctuation pattern, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and the process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these pieces of information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and is performed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the variation display associated with the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S501: Yes), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203d (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether the current state is a normal symbol time saving state (S508). Specifically, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203e is on, it is determined that the time saving state is normal symbol, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 0, Moreover, if the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the state is a normal state with normal symbols (not a time saving state).

In the process of S508, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second winning random number table for high probability times are used. Based on this, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)).

On the other hand, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second win random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the second win for low probability Based on the random number table, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see 202c1 in FIG. 9(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S511: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the process of S511, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514: Yes), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is determined. is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, if it is determined that the normal state is the normal state of the symbol (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this processing end. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. The frequency of drawing patterns increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of normal symbols increases, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 becomes easier to open, so that the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64. It becomes easy.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. The process ends, and the stopped symbols (normal symbols) are stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a hit for the normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is in the time saving state for the normal symbol (S520), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S520: Yes), sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S522), and moves to the process of S523. . On the other hand, in the process of S520, if it is determined that the normal state is the normal state of the normal symbol (not the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 are determined. , "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S521), and the process moves to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 if there is a winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of holding the variable display in the normal pattern) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening 67 (S601: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d ( If M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the vacant holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process moves to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S814 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S814 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 29, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S815, S816).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. In addition, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S815, S816) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power outage is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S809), and the process moves to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it enters a state where it can start payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various performances. Next, the values of the probability change flag 203e and the time saving counter 203f are read (S811)), and a status command is set for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the gaming status indicated by each read value (S812). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the status command, the audio lamp control device 113 updates the data in the gaming status storage area 223g of the RAM 223 according to the gaming status indicated by the status command. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the gaming state immediately after power is turned on. After the process of S812 is completed, interrupts are permitted (S813), and the process moves to the main process described later. Note that the status command is composed of, for example, 1 byte of data, and the gaming status can be notified by the data of the lower 2 bits. That is, the lowest bit is a bit indicating whether or not it is in a time saving state, and if the lowest bit is on, it indicates that the current state is a normal symbol time saving state. On the other hand, when the least significant bit is off, it indicates that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol. Further, the data of the second lower bit is a bit indicating whether or not the probability is variable, and if the lower second bit is on, it indicates that the current state is the probability variable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, when the second lower bit is off, it indicates that the current state is a low probability state of a special symbol. By determining whether each bit of this status command is on or off, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily identify the gaming status.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the command for the number of reserved balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a game ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, a specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in a jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. Starting at device 37. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time has elapsed. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display 37, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). A stop indication (lit indication) is given on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25). The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed ( (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process moves to S901, and each process from S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 27 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S908 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is turned off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 29), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of specific winning openings ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1001, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a jackpot (S1003: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific prize opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the game ball enters a predetermined position. If a number (for example, 10) of prizes have been won, it is determined that the closing condition has been met.

In the process of S1007, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out has ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1009, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If so (S1011: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot A (that is, a jackpot B) (S1012: No), by overwriting the value of the time saving counter 203f with 100, the normal symbol will be played 100 times after the jackpot ends. A setting is made so that a short period of time is granted (S1013), and the process moves to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203e, the probability variation state of the special symbol will be given after the jackpot ends. (S1014), and the process moves to S1015.

In the process of S1013 or S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery status of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (whether it is a variable probability state of the special symbol or a low probability state of the special symbol) is voiced. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), an end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 31, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S4116 (see Figure 32). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113: Yes in FIG. 32), it executes the power-off process in S4116. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred. or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if this start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4116, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 32). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S4008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the main Analyzes the gaming state at power-on indicated by the status command output during the start-up process of the control device 110 (see FIG. 28) (S4011), and stores the gaming status according to the gaming status notified by the status command. The data in area 223g is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S4010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the main controller 110 Analyzes the gaming state at power-on indicated by the status command output during the start-up process (see FIG. 28) (S4011), and stores the gaming status storage area 223g according to the gaming status notified by the status command. The data is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004 when the process reaches S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S4101 was executed (S4101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S4101 was executed. If not (S4101: No), the process moves to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed or not, whereas S4102 to S4110 are mainly related to display (effect) and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4111 and the process to update the variable display setting process in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S4112 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in each process of S4103 to S4112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S4102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). . The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process is performed in which a reservation lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing is a process of monitoring an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and setting a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. That is, this is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operational validity period of the continuous transformation performance.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S4110), and the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4111, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Then, when the command determination process ends, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). The command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4201). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( S4203), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). If a stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol The number N) of pending fluctuation display is extracted and stored in the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4208). In addition, in the process of S4208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After completing the process in S4208, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Every time a winning is detected or a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the number of special symbol reserved balls of the main controller 110 through the process of S4208. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., when a starting winning is detected or a special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. In addition, when the process of S4208 is executed, a display pending ball number command that notifies the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol held ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223g is updated according to the gaming status indicated by the received status command (S4210), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the received winning command is analyzed and winning information command processing is executed to determine the execution of the continuous preview performance (S4212). , return to main processing. Details of this winning information command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to cancel the preview lottery prohibition state, and if it is the timing to cancel the preview lottery prohibition state, all the pending A stop command process is executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the result of the lottery of reserved balls (S4214). Details of this stop command processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. When the process of S4214 is completed, the process then sets the stopped display of the third symbol that is changing (S4215), and returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S4216 ), return to main processing. For example, if the other command is an opening command, a display opening command is set in the display control device 114 to instruct the display control device 114 to start a jackpot opening effect. Further, for example, if the other command is an ending command, a display ending command is set in the display control device 114 to instruct the display control device 114 to start a jackpot ending performance.

By executing this command determination process, appropriate processing can be executed in accordance with the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, details of the winning information command processing (S4212) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. As described above, this winning information command processing (S4212) is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining the execution of the continuous preview performance.

In the winning information command process (see FIG. 34), first, the information notified by the received winning information command is transferred to the lowest numbered reservation area among the vacant areas of the first to fourth reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is read (S4302), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4303).

In the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 (S4303: No), the number of reserved balls (2 or more) required to execute the continuous notice performance is not reached. This means that the process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on ( S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304: Yes), the current preview lottery is prohibited, and the determination of whether or not continuous preview performances can be executed (execution lottery) is prohibited. Therefore, the process of S4305 to S4311 for performing the lottery for execution of the continuous preview performance is skipped, and the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is off (S4304: No), the preview selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read out (S4305), and the read preview selection table 222b is read out (S4305). Among them, by comparing the random value (counter value) specified corresponding to the variation type notified by the current winning information command and the value of the performance lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. (S4306). That is, it is determined whether any one of the ranges of random numbers defined in association with each of the advance notice effects A to C matches the value of the effect lottery counter 223f.

Next, it is determined whether the determination result in the process of S4306 corresponds to the execution of the continuous preview performance (S4307), and if the determination result corresponds to the non-execution of the continuous preview performance (S4307: No). , this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (S4307: Yes), first, the performance type of the current continuous preview performance specified from the preview selection table 222b is selected. The notice type flag 223k is updated accordingly (S4308). That is, if the current performance type is preview performance A, the first bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0), and if the current performance type is preview performance B, the preview type flag 223k is set to off (0). The second bit of 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0), and if it is a preview effect C, the third bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are turned off ( 0).

When the process of S4308 is completed, next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read out (S4309), and the read counter value is set in the advance notice number counter 223i (S4310). Thereby, it is possible to set execution of the continuous preview performance over the variable display based on all currently held balls. When the process of S4310 is completed, the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON to set the preview lottery prohibited state (S4311), and this process ends.

By executing this winning information command process (see Figure 34), the variable display based on the held balls that are on hold at the time the current winning information command is received, and the variable display based on the winning information command are executed. You can set up a continuous preview effect. As described above, when the lottery result notified by the winning information command is a jackpot than when it is a loss, the determination rate of continuous preview performance is higher. Therefore, when the continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about a big win.

Next, details of the above-described stop command processing (S4214) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. As described above, this stop command processing (S4214) determines whether it is the timing to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state, and if it is the timing to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the lottery results of all the reserved balls are displayed. This is a process for determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the above.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the stop command process (see FIG. 35) is executed, it is determined whether the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on (S4401), and if it is determined that it is off (S4401: No). ) This means that it is not time to cancel the preview lottery prohibition state, so this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is on (that is, it is the timing to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state) (S4401: Yes), the advance notice performance prohibition flag 223h is set in order to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state. is set to OFF, and the advance notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is also set to OFF (S4402). Next, the counter value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4403), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4404).

In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 1 (S4404: No), it is less than the number of reserved balls necessary to execute the continuous notice performance, This process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4404: Yes), there are more reserved balls than the number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous notice performance. Since this means that the ball is on hold, the processes of S4405 to S4415 are executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each held ball.

More specifically, first, the logical sum (see FIG. 14) of the upper 6 bits of data in each of the reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a, except for the first reservation area, is calculated (S4405). Then, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated logical sum is 1 (on) (S4406), and if it is on (S4406: Yes), the variation type of the on bit (i.e. per special reach) is determined. Each process of S4409 to S4415 for determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is executed at the corresponding rate.

On the other hand, in the process of S4406, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is not 1 (that is, it is 0) (S4406: No), then the bit that is one bit lower than the currently determined bit is 1 (on) is determined (S4407). In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the lower bit by one bit is also not 1 (that is, it is 0) (S4407: No), it is determined whether the bit determined this time is the lowest bit in the OR data. It is determined (S4408).

In the process of S4408, if it is determined that the target bit subjected to the current determination is not the lowest bit in the OR data (S4408: No), the process moves to S4407, and from this point on, the process of S4407 is performed. Either a 1 (on) bit is detected in the determination (S4407: Yes), or it is determined in the process of S4408 that all bits up to the lowest bit are not 1 (on) (that is, 0) (S4408 ), the processes of S4407 and S4408 are repeatedly executed.

In the process of S4407, if a bit of 1 (on) is detected (S4407: Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect at a rate according to the variation type to which the bit of 1 (on) is associated. Each process of S4409 to S4415 is executed to do so. On the other hand, in the process of S4408, if it is determined that all the bits up to the lowest bit are not 1 (on) (in other words, 0) (S4408: No), there is a continuous This means that the lottery result that is the subject of determination as to whether or not the advance notice performance can be executed is not included, so the process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S4406 or S4407, if a 1 (ON) bit is detected from the OR data (S4406: Yes, or S4407: Yes), first, the preview selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is Read out (S4409). Next, based on the variation type associated with the bit detected to be 1 (on) in the process of S4406 or S4407 and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, the readout preview selection table 222b is referred to. It is determined whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance (whether the performance lottery counter 223f matches any of the random numbers defined in the preview selection table 222b) (S4410).

When the processing in S4410 is completed, the determination result in the processing in S4410 corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (the performance lottery counter 223f matches one of the random numbers specified in the preview selection table 222b). (S4411), and if the result of the determination is that it is not compatible with the execution of the continuous preview performance (S4411: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (S4411: Yes), first, according to the performance type of the current continuous preview performance specified from the preview selection table 222b, The notification type flag 223k is updated (S4412). That is, if the current performance type is preview performance A, the first bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0), and if the current performance type is preview performance B, the preview type flag 223k is set to off (0). The second bit of 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0), and if it is a preview effect C, the third bit of the preview type flag 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are turned off ( 0).

When the process of S4412 is completed, next, the holding areas in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that is the target of the current determination is set to 1 (on) are searched in order from the fourth holding area side ( S4413), the value corresponding to the searched holding area is set in the advance notice counter 223i (S4414). For example, if the search result is in the fourth pending area, the advance notice counter 223i is set to 4. For example, if the search result is in the second pending area, the advance notice counter 223i is set to 2.

The reason for searching from the 4th holding area side is to set a continuous preview effect over more held balls when there are multiple holding areas where the search target bit in S4413 is 1 (on). be. Specifically, for example, the determination of whether or not the current continuous preview performance can be executed is determined based on the lottery result corresponding to the variation type of out of super reach, and the out of super reach is applied to the fourth pending area and the second area. If data corresponding to is stored, by searching from the fourth reservation area side, it is possible to first detect that the fourth reservation area is out of super reach. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution of a continuous preview effect over four variable displays. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the search is performed from the first pending area, the search ends when data outside the super reach in the second pending area is detected, so the variable display that is subject to the continuous preview effect (This results in two variable displays based on the data stored in the first and second pending areas). Therefore, by performing a search from the fourth pending area side, it is possible to set a continuous preview effect across more variable displays, thereby continuously arousing the player's sense of anticipation over a longer period of time. be able to.

When the process of S4414 is completed, the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is turned on to set the preview lottery prohibited state (S4415), and this process ends.

By this stop command processing, at the timing when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, logical sum data is generated based on the data of all pending areas except the first pending area in the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical Based on the sum data, it is possible to determine whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed. With this configuration, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case where it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance after checking the details of the data of all the holding areas. can. More specifically, for example, in the case where all the reserved balls are off long or short (i.e., a lottery result that is not subject to the determination of whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed), in the first embodiment, the logical Since all bits of the sum data become 0, the process can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of determining each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Furthermore, for example, even if there are multiple reserved balls to be judged as to whether or not a continuous preview performance can be executed, if the judgment is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit that is set to data 1 is judged. Therefore, it is possible to easily specify the variation type with the highest expectation level (priority for determining whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed) among the pending events. Therefore, each bit of all pending areas is determined, and among the multiple variation types that are subject to judgment as to whether continuous notice performances can be executed, the variation with the highest expectation level (priority for determining whether continuous notice performances can be executed) is selected. There is no need to perform processing such as identifying the type. Therefore, processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the process of S4413, a search is performed for holding areas in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that is the subject of determination of continuous preview performance is turned on, in order from the fourth holding area. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the search is performed sequentially starting from the first reservation area. With this configuration, when there are multiple suspended balls of the variable type that are the target of determining whether or not to execute the current continuous preview performance specified based on the logical OR data, the continuous preview performance can be executed. It is possible to prevent a variation display of a variation type having the same expectation level from being executed multiple times during the process. In other words, for example, when data corresponding to the fluctuation type of out of super reach is stored in the second hold area and the fourth hold area, if the hold area is searched from the hold fourth area side, the hold area A continuous preview performance will be executed until the variable display corresponding to the area data is displayed. In this case, in one continuous preview performance, the super reach failure (fluctuating display with high expectations) occurs twice (multiple times). Although highly anticipated fluctuating displays occur one after another, and continuous preview effects are executed in between, expectations for a jackpot are further heightened. This may greatly reduce the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, if the search for the holding area is performed from the first holding area side, it is possible to limit the number of times that the variable display of the highly anticipated variation type is executed in one continuous preview performance to the minimum. To make it difficult for a player's motivation to play to decrease even if he loses in continuous preview performances.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S4501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S4507. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S4502), and then, in the process of S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired (S4503).

Next, it is determined whether a continuous preview effect is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and if it is set, a preview effect setting process for setting the preview effect is executed (S4504). . Details of this preview effect setting process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the process of S4504 is completed, a display variation pattern command is generated to notify the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S4504, and the command is sent to the display control device. 114 (S4505). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4506). In the process of S4506, the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S4507.

In the process of S4507, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4507). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S4507: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S4507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S4508), and then, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4509).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable production in the third symbol display device 81, and based on the set stop type, the stop type is sent to the display control device 114. A display stop type command for notification is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4510), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, details of the above-mentioned preview effect setting process (S4504) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. This preview effect setting process (S4504) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36), and as described above, continuous preview effects are applied to the variable display to be started based on the current variable pattern command. This is a process for determining whether it has been set and, if it has been set, for setting a preview effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether the value of the preview number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4601), and if the value is greater than 0, (S4601: Yes), which means that a continuous preview effect is set for the current variable display, so the preview type flag 223k is read (S4602). Next, a variation pattern accompanied by a preview effect in the form indicated by the notice type flag 223k is determined with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4603), the value of the notice number counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and the main processing is performed. end.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the value of the notice number counter 223i is 0 (S4601: No), first, the variation pattern of the aspect not accompanied by the notice effect is referred to the variation pattern selection table 222a. It is determined (S4605), and then it is determined whether the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606). In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the first variable display after the end of the continuous preview performance, so the preview is prohibited. The release flag 223j is set to on (S4607), and this processing ends. By setting the notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4607, the notice lottery prohibition state continues during the variable period of the variable display that starts this time (the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice performance). At the end of the variation, the preview lottery prohibition state can be canceled during the stop command process (see FIG. 35) (see S4402 in FIG. 35). By configuring the preview drawing prohibition state to continue until the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice performance, it is possible to suppress the continuous notice performance from being executed again without any interval after the end of the continuous notice performance. can.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 51. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently in use are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 39, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 38. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 49(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 49(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)), the simple command is used so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. A determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable production is issued. If a display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation is displayed. Can perform. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(b). FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 40(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 20, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command judgment process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. First, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 42(a). FIG. 42(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 41. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 42(b). FIG. 42(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to F, small hit, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) is executed, and displays the result on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable performance is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 43(a). FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of a change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to on. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7002. .

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back side A or B should be displayed according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image determination flag set in S7002 is used to determine whether the back side image is to be displayed. The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 41. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). FIG. 45(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 41. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. In addition to executing the variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 42(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 42(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each extracted command, for other commands, Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 46, it is first determined whether the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No). ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 46. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to FIG. 46 and continue the explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S7501: No in FIG. 49(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S7712), and proceeds to the process of S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process indicated by the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the stop type information displayed is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 40(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous preview performance in which the same type of preview performance is executed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays. Basically, whether or not this continuous notice performance can be executed is determined when a new starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, it is executed over a variable display based on the reserved balls that are being held at the time when a new starting winning is detected, and a changing display based on the new starting winning. This continuous preview performance is more likely to be decided in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the lottery result of a new starting prize. This can create a feeling of anticipation for a big hit.

Further, in the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, a preview lottery prohibition state is set which prohibits the lottery of the continuous preview performance. This is to prevent (suppress) continuous preview performances from being determined redundantly while the continuous preview performances are being executed. To be more specific, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the detection of a new starting prize even during the execution of the continuous preview performance, the type of the preview performance may be changed during the continuous preview performance. There is a possibility that it will be switched. For example, during the execution of a continuous preview performance for which preview performance B is set, a new starting prize is detected and it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, and if the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, then the preview performance B There is a risk that the preview performance A will be canceled and the next change will be switched to the preview performance A. In other words, the player may be disappointed by switching from a performance type (notice performance B) with relatively high expectations to a performance type (notice performance A) with low expectations. In addition, if a continuous preview performance of the same performance type is newly determined during the execution of a continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance will be continuously displayed for a number of times that is equal to or greater than the number of suspended balls that were held at the start of the continuous preview performance. A preview performance will be performed. As a result, it may become difficult for the player to understand which reserved balls he should have high expectations for, and the meaning of the performance may become difficult to understand. In addition, as a method to solve these problems, only when a starting winning corresponding to a jackpot is detected during the execution of a continuous notice performance that ultimately loses, it is possible to judge whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed. In addition, a method may be considered in which the performance type of the continuous preview performance that is additionally determined has a level of expectation higher than the performance type of the continuous preview performance that is currently being executed. However, in this case, each time a starting prize is detected during the execution of a continuous preview performance, it is necessary to perform control processing to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance and the type of notice by determining multiple conditions. , there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, a new continuous preview performance is executed from the time when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, after the end of the continuous preview performance, until the end of one variable display. The configuration is such that it is prohibited to determine whether or not it is possible. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance type from switching during the execution of the continuous preview performance, or to prevent the continuous preview performance from continuing beyond the number of pending pitches at the start of the continuous preview performance. I can do it. Furthermore, at the time of starting winning, it is only necessary to perform simple control such as determining whether or not the advance notice lottery is prohibited, and if the advance notice lottery is prohibited, skipping the process of determining whether or not continuous notice performances can be executed. The processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the preview lottery prohibited state is lifted, the lottery results of all the reserved balls that are on hold at that time are determined, and based on the determination results, the continuous preview performance is The configuration is such that it determines whether or not it can be executed. The details of the determination method will be described later, but by taking into consideration the lottery results of all reserved balls and determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, even if the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved, It is possible to suppress the execution of continuous preview performances from being set based on reserved balls with low expectations. Therefore, even though a continuous preview effect is set for a held ball with low expectations, a continuous preview effect may not be set for a held ball with high expectations, or a continuous preview effect is set for a held ball with high expectations in the middle of a continuous preview effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball is consumed and a held ball with low expectations is consumed in the last variable display of a continuous preview performance. Therefore, continuous preview effects can be suitably executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibited state is continued after the end of the continuous preview performance until the end of one normal variable display (in which no preview performance is set). With this configuration, it is possible to perform at least one normal variable display after the continuous preview performance ends and before the next continuous preview performance starts. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous preview performance from starting again immediately after the end of the continuous preview performance and continuing the continuous preview performance endlessly. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand which reserved ball should have expectations during the execution of the continuous preview performance.

In the first embodiment, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, logical sum data is generated based on the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a, and based on the logical sum data, Although the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which logical sum data is generated every time a winning information command is received and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 223. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the logical sum data when the preview lottery prohibited state is lifted, so it is possible to skip the process of calculating the logical sum data when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled. The processing load required for determination can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute a continuous notice performance, the continuous notice performance is executed for all the reserved balls that are on hold at the time of the decision, but this is not limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, when it is decided to perform the continuous preview performance, the range of reserved balls for which the continuous preview performance is to be performed may be further determined in accordance with a lottery result or the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a continuous preview performance in which a win is announced in the end, the number of consecutive preview performances is set to be 3 or less, while in the case of a continuous preview performance in which a win is announced in the end. In the case of a preview performance, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of consecutive preview performances is allowed up to four times. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive preview presentations, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute a continuous notice performance, a continuous notice performance is set for all the reserved balls that are on hold at the time of the decision, and then the continuous notice performance is ended. Up until now, the system had been configured to prohibit advance lottery drawings. That is, once the number of consecutive preview performances in the continuous preview performance is determined, the number of consecutive preview performances is not increased or decreased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if it is decided to execute a continuous preview performance, if a new winning information command is received during the execution of the continuous preview performance, a lottery for execution of the continuous preview performance may be performed. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to extend the continuous preview performance until the variable display corresponding to the new winning information (continuous preview extension lottery). In this case, the continuous notice extension lottery may be performed only in the case of a continuous notice performance that informs that the continuous notice performance that is being executed is finally a failure. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously execute the continuous preview performance for a greater number of times, thereby increasing the player's interest. Further, the extension of the continuous preview performance may be determined only when a new starting prize is a win. By configuring this way, if the continuous notice performance exceeds the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, which is 4, the player will not only win the consecutive notice extension lottery, but also receive a jackpot. You can also make them understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with more attention paid to the number of consecutive preview performances during the execution of the continuous preview performances.

In the first embodiment, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each reservation area is calculated and used to determine the execution of the continuous preview performance, but the number is not limited to 6 bits, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 etc. You can set it as you like. Further, the lottery probability (judgment ratio) of the continuous preview performance corresponding to each lottery result may also be arbitrarily determined.

In the first embodiment, the continuous preview performance can be performed only when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the number of balls on hold is one, it may be configured to draw lots to determine whether or not the preview performance can be executed. In this case, the structure may be such that the variable display of the third symbol accompanied by the preview effect is performed singly within the first variable time (that is, the variable time of the first symbol and the variable time of the third symbol are made to match). Okay, execute the variable display of the third symbol with a preview effect multiple times within one variable time (that is, execute the variable display of the third symbol multiple times with a shorter variation time than the first symbol) ) may also be configured.

In the first embodiment, as a continuous preview performance, three identical third symbols are displayed within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the three third symbols are stopped and displayed, the third symbol is displayed. Although the preview effect displayed in a fiery manner has been described, the mode of the preview effect is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of a continuous preview effect, the same (or similar) effect may occur at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) for each variation, or the same effect (or a similar effect) may occur at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation stops). ) may have a configuration in which the same (or similar in aspect) characters appear. In addition, a series of performances with a storyline (for example, a performance in which a jackpot is announced by fighting and winning against an enemy, a performance in which a jackpot is announced if you can escape from the enemy, etc.) are set up as continuous preview performances. The configuration may be such that the process is executed for all variable displays. Furthermore, when a continuous notice effect is set, it is not necessarily necessary to execute the same type of notice effect for all variable displays within the setting range; for example, when a notice effect is determined, the decision of the said notice effect is The configuration may be such that the mode of the pending symbol indicating the pending ball corresponding to the pending symbol is changed to a different mode from normal until the end of the variation (for example, the color of the pending symbol is varied, the pending symbol is changed to a predetermined character, etc.) . By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the reserved ball before the variable display based on the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol whose aspect has been changed is started.

In the first embodiment, when a continuous preview effect is set, the main symbols with the same numbers displayed in each symbol row are different from the other third symbols (i.e., Although the present invention is configured such that the display mode is displayed in a different mode, the effect changing to a different mode may be executed even when the continuous preview effect is not being executed. Specifically, for example, only when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, one main symbol is displayed in the same manner as the preview presentation, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed with the main symbol whose appearance has been changed. An effect may be performed in which the main symbol with the same number as the symbol is not displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in the same manner as the preview performance, and when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the appearance is changed. An effect may be performed in which the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol that has been displayed is not stopped and displayed. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which, up to the middle, the performance remains the same as when the preview performance is set, and midway through, a performance (so-called fake performance) is performed that is different from the preview performance. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous preview performance has started until the performance mode differs from the preview performance, so that the player can win the execution lottery for the continuous preview performance for a long period of time. Even if it is not possible to do so, it is possible to create a feeling of anticipation for the continuous preview performance.

In the first embodiment, the ratio at which continuous preview performances are determined and the ratio of the types of each preview performance are variable depending on the type of variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the variable type, the rate at which continuous preview performances are determined or the ratio of the types of each preview performance may be varied depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot depending on whether or not the continuous preview performance is executed and the type of the preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the continuous preview performance. can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when a starting prize is detected in a state where the preview lottery is not prohibited (the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on) and the winning information command is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the preview is always announced. In the selection table 222b, the range of random numbers (the value of the performance lottery counter 223f) corresponding to the current variation type is referred to to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed (by lottery), but this is limited. It's not a thing. For example, if a reserved ball with a higher expectation level than the current starting prize (with a lottery result advantageous to the player) is already reserved, it may be configured such that the continuous preview performance is not drawn. If a continuous preview performance is decided while a pending ball with higher expectations than the current starting prize is already on hold, after the fluctuating display with higher expectations is executed in the middle of the continuous preview performance, , a situation occurs in which a variable display with a relatively low level of expectation is executed in the final variable display of a continuous preview performance. In other words, there is a risk that the level of expectations will be lowered. On the other hand, if a ball with high expectations is already on hold, by configuring the system so that the lottery itself for the continuous preview performance is not executed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the expectation level from dwindling. Therefore, the fluctuating display executed at the end of the continuous preview performance can create a greater sense of anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled when the variation ends once after the continuous preview performance ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled when the last variable display of the continuous preview performance ends.

In the first embodiment, when a starting prize is detected in a state where the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed is performed without any restriction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a jackpot is already included in the reservation, it may be configured to avoid determining whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the continuous preview performance from being interrupted due to a jackpot occurring in the middle of the continuous preview performance. Further, for example, when a jackpot lottery result is held in the first holding area, the system may be configured to avoid determining whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed. With this configuration, even if there is already a jackpot in the hold at the time a new starting winning is detected, the fluctuation with at least two preview performances will occur until the jackpot is announced. Display can be executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the variable display accompanied by the preview performance from being executed only once to notify the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous preview performance is executed to notify the player of a jackpot, so that it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming unnatural. In this case, the settings for the continuous preview performance are reset at the moment the jackpot is reached, and when the jackpot ends, the decision is made as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the lottery results (variation type) of each reserved ball. It may be configured to perform the determination.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 59. In the first embodiment described above, each time a starting winning is detected, the special symbol lottery result (win/failure, fluctuation pattern, etc.) is read in advance from various counter values (random values) acquired based on the starting winning. The audio lamp control device 113 was configured to notify the pre-reading result by a winning information command. The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether to perform continuous preview performance based on the prefetch results notified by the winning information command. Further, in the first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, a notice lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the continuous notice performance from being determined repeatedly. . Then, when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of cancellation is calculated, and the continuous preview performance is executed based on the logical sum. It was configured to determine whether or not it was possible. In other words, based on the logical sum data, it is determined whether the suspended balls include the fluctuation type that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed, and which fluctuation type has the highest degree of expectation among the currently held balls. The configuration was such that it determines what type it is. If there is a variation type that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, then it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed using the determination ratio (lottery probability) that corresponds to the variation type with the highest expectation level ( It was structured as a lottery.

In contrast, in the second embodiment, points are set according to the type of fluctuation, and the total value of points corresponding to one or more pieces of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. . While the preview lottery is prohibited, the total points are updated every time a new winning information command is received, and when the preview lottery is disabled, the total points are suspended based on the total value of the points. The system is configured to grasp the type of variation included in the ball and determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of a starting prize in the main control device 110, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined. The configuration is such that the range of values is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of acquired values without performing pre-reading. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the range of random numbers (counter values) notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110 instead of the winning information command. , the configuration is such that pre-reading is executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the audio lamp control device The configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in 113 have been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The point is that the control processing performed has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in second embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 52, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52(a), the ROM 202 of the second embodiment has a random number range selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9(a)). There is a difference. The other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random number range selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to specify the range of values to which various counter values (random numbers) acquired based on the starting winnings for the first ball entrance 64 belong. At the time of starting winning, various counter values are compared with this random number range selection table 202e, and the value range to which the counter value (random number) belongs is specified (see S412 in FIG. 55). The specified value range of the counter value (random value) is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by a random number range command (see S413 in FIG. 55).

The details of this random number range selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIGS. 52(b) and 52(c). FIG. 52(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number range selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 52(b), the random number range selection table 202e includes a winning random number range table 202e1 for specifying the value range of the first winning random number counter C1, and a winning random number range table 202e1 for specifying the value range of the first winning type counter C2. It is composed of at least a winning type range table 202e2 for specifying the winning type range table 202e2 and a variation type range table 202e3 for specifying the range of the value of the variable type counter CS1.

With reference to FIG. 52(c), an overview of the stipulated contents of each table configuring the random number range selection table 202e will be explained by taking the winning random number range table 202e1 as an example among the tables configuring the random number range selection table 202e. .

As shown in FIG. 52(c), in the winning random number range table 202e1, data (range parameter) indicating the range of the random number value (counter value) is associated with the value range of the first winning random number counter C1. stipulated. More specifically, the range parameter "00H" is defined in association with the value "0" of the first random number counter C1 (that is, the jackpot random number in the low probability state of the special symbol and the variable probability state). , the range parameter "01H" is defined in association with the value range "1 to 9" of the first winning random number counter C1 (that is, the jackpot random number in the probability variable state of the special symbol), and the first winning random number counter C1 is For the value range "10 to 49" of C1, a range parameter "02H" is defined in correspondence, and for the value range "50 to 99" of the first random number counter C1, a range parameter "02H" is defined. 03H" are defined in association with each other, and a range parameter "04H" is defined in association with the value range "100 to 149" of the first random number counter C1. Thereafter, a different range parameter value is defined in association with every 50 random number value ranges.

Referring to this winning random number range table 202e1, for example, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is "60", the range to which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 belongs is " 50 to 99'', “03H” is specified as the range parameter indicating the range of the current random number value. Also, for example, if the value of the first random number counter C1 that has been acquired is "375", the range to which the value of the first random number counter C1 belongs is "350 to 399", so the range of the current random number value is "09H" is specified as a range parameter indicating.

Note that in each range, only determination values corresponding to the same determination result are defined. That is, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "00H", only the determination value that is determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "01H", only the determination value that is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, only determination values that are determined to be out of range are defined in the range corresponding to the range parameters "02H" to "09H". In this way, by configuring each range only with the same type of determination value, it is possible to create a one-to-one correspondence between each range and the determination result. In other words, judgment values corresponding to multiple judgment results will be mixed in one range, and even if the range is specified, it will not be possible to specify the judgment result using the counter value (random value) in the range. can be suppressed. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately execute the pre-reading process based on the range parameters specified and notified by referring to the winning random number range table 202e1.

Although not shown in the figure, the other tables (win type range table 202e2, fluctuation type range table 202e3) that constitute the random number range selection table 202e are similarly set to the first winning type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS1. The value range of , and the value of the range parameter are defined in association with each other. Further, the plurality of ranges set in each table are all composed of only judgment values corresponding to the same judgment result.

As described above, the range parameters specified by referring to each data table defined in the random number range selection table 202e, such as the winning random number range table 202e1, are output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the random number range command. . The audio lamp control device 113 pre-reads various lottery results (special symbol lottery results, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern) based on the range of values to which various counter values (random numbers) notified by the random number range command belong. Although the details will be described later, in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, ranges of various counter values (random values) that can be notified by random number range commands and lottery results based on the various counter values are defined in association with each other. A data table is provided. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, it pre-reads the lottery results for each type of counter based on each data table.

In this way, the range to which the various counter values (random values) acquired based on the starting winnings belong is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 side outputs the range to which the various counter values (random values) obtained based on the starting winnings belong. The processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced by implementing a configuration in which pre-reading is executed based on a data table that defines the correspondence between the range to which the random number value belongs and the lottery result. That is, when a starting prize is detected, the main control device 110 needs to execute a process of pre-reading the lottery result by comparing each random value specified in various data tables with the counter value obtained this time. Instead, it is sufficient to simply compare the value range specified in the random number range selection table 202e and the counter value obtained this time. Therefore, by reducing the processing load on the main control device 110, which performs major controls related to games, such as drawing jackpots and updating the display mode of the first symbol, the main controls related to games can be reliably executed without delay. can do. In addition, instead of outputting the counter value (random value) itself acquired based on the starting prize to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 converts the counter value (random value) into a value range to which it belongs. Since the configuration is such that even if a random number range command is illegally obtained from the outside, the random number that will be a jackpot (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) will be generated from the illegally obtained random number range command. It can be made difficult to predict. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts can be enhanced. In addition, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, based on the range of the notified counter value (random value), it is possible to execute pre-read processing corresponding to various counters, so the main control device 110 performs special symbol fluctuation start processing. (See FIG. 23) It is possible to execute pre-reading under conditions closer to those of the various lottery selections executed in (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the prefetch results.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. First, FIG. 53(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a point selection table 222c and a random number table according to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)). 222d, a dependent per type table 222e, a dependent variable type table 222f, and a release selection table 222g are added at least.

The point selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to in order to specify points according to the variation type specified by pre-reading. During the preview lottery prohibited state, each time a variation type is specified by pre-reading, this point selection table 222c is referred to and the total value of points is updated.

Details of this point selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 54(a). FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the point selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 54(a), points are defined in association with each variation type in this point selection table 222c.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), for the variation type "per special reach", "30 points" is defined in association (see 222c1 in FIG. 54(a)), and the variation type is "per special reach". "5 points" are defined in association with the types "per super reach" and "per normal reach" (see 222c2, 222c3 in Figure 54(a)), "missing special reach" and "per normal reach". "1 point" is defined in association with "missing" and "missing normal reach" (see 222c4 to 222c6 in FIG. 54(a)). On the other hand, "0 points" are defined in association with other variation types ("long deviation", "short deviation") (see 222c7 in FIG. 54(a)).

In the second embodiment, when the variation type is specified by pre-reading based on the random number range command in the preview lottery prohibited state, this point selection table 222c is referred to and the points corresponding to the current pre-reading result are specified. The identified points are added to a point storage area 223m, which will be described later. Thereby, in the state where the advance lottery is prohibited, it is possible to constantly update the points corresponding to all the reserved balls at the same time as the pre-reading.

Returning to FIG. 53(a), the explanation will be continued. The slave per random number table 222d, the slave per type type table 222e, and the slave fluctuation type table 222f are the first per random number counter C1, the first per type random number counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter output from the main controller 110 by the random number range command, respectively. This is a data table that is referred to in order to pre-read the validity of special symbols, jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern based on the range of values to which each CS1 belongs. The configuration of each of these tables will be explained with reference to FIG. 54(b), taking the dependent random number table 222d as an example.

FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the dependent random number table 222d. As shown in FIG. 54(b), the random number table 222d includes a range of random numbers for determining a special symbol jackpot for each gaming state (special symbol low probability state, high probability state). parameters) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), "00H" is defined in association with the range (range parameter) of random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol (FIG. 54(b)). (See 222d1 in Fig. 54(b)), "00H, 01H" is defined in association with the range (range parameter) of random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol (222d2 in Fig. 54(b)). reference).

Although not shown in the diagram, the values of the range parameters corresponding to the first hit type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS1 are similarly set for other data tables (sub-hit type table 222e, sub-variable type table 222f). and the determined jackpot type or fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Upon receiving the random number range command, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts range parameters corresponding to each of the first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 notified by the command. The value of each range parameter is compared with the secondary winning random number table 222d, the secondary winning type table 222e, and the secondary fluctuation type table 222f to pre-read the special symbol lottery results, jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern. Based on the notified range of counter values (random values), it is possible to execute pre-read processing corresponding to various counters, so that the pre-read processing corresponding to various counters can be executed in the main controller 110 during the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 23). Pre-reading can be performed under conditions that are closer to the various lottery results. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the prefetch results. When the prefetching process is completed, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, similarly to the first embodiment. In addition, in the state where the preview lottery is prohibited, instead of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance, points corresponding to the variation type specified by pre-reading are specified by referring to the point selection table, and the data in the point storage area 223m is determined. Perform the process of updating.

Returning to FIG. 53(a), the explanation will be continued. The cancellation selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when drawing a continuous preview performance when the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is lifted, continuous advance notice is drawn by comparing the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m divided by the number of reserved pitches with the cancellation selection table 222g. Determine whether or not the performance can be executed.

Here, details of the cancellation selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 54(c). FIG. 54(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the cancellation selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 54(c), the cancellation selection table 222g includes an effect lottery counter 223f in which the execution of continuous preview effects is determined for each range of the average value of points stored in the point storage area 223m. The range of values for each is specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), when the average value (A) of points is larger than 5, the value range of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance A is set to ``0''. ~19'' are defined in association with each other, and as the value range of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to preview performance B, "20 to 49" are defined in association with each other, and the value of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to preview performance C is defined. As the range, "50 to 59" is defined in correspondence (see 222g1 in FIG. 54(c)).

In addition, if the average value (A) of points is 5 or less and a value greater than 1, "0 to 4" is associated as the value range of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to preview performance A. "5 to 19" is defined as the range of the value of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance B, and "20 to 19" is defined as the range of the value of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance C. 29'' are defined in association with each other (see 222g2 in FIG. 54(c)). Furthermore, if the average value (A) of points is less than or equal to 1, "0 to 8" is defined as the value range of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance A, and the range of values of the performance lottery counter 223f corresponding to the preview performance B "9" is defined as the value of the production lottery counter 223f corresponding to (see 222g3 in FIG. 54(c)). With this cancellation selection table 222g, when the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to randomly determine (determine) whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based on the lottery probability (judgment ratio) according to the average value of points.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). The RAM 223 in the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12(b)) in that a point storage area 223m is added. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The point storage area 223m is a storage area for storing and updating the total value of points corresponding to the variation type of each reserved ball during the preview lottery prohibited state. This point storage area 223m stores the total value of the values obtained by converting the variation types corresponding to all the held balls into points at the time when the execution of the continuous notice performance is decided (see Fig. 57). (See S4713). The points stored in this point storage area 223m are calculated every time a random number range command is received based on a new starting prize and a prefetch process is executed based on the range of random numbers (counter value) notified by the command. , points corresponding to the variation type specified by pre-reading are added and updated (see S4705 in FIG. 57). Further, when starting a new variable display during the preview lottery prohibited state, points corresponding to the variation type of the variable display to be started are subtracted and updated (see S4613 in FIG. 59).

<About the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment. This starting winning process 2 (S111) is a process that is executed in place of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and similarly to the starting winning process (see FIG. 24), This is a process that is executed when a prize is won to 64 (starting prize).

In the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in this second embodiment, each process of S401 to S406 is the same as each process of S401 to S406 of the starting winning process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 24). Processing is executed. In addition, in the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when the process of S406 is finished, the random number range selection table 202e (see FIG. 52(b)) is read out (S411), and By comparing the obtained random number range selection table 202e with the acquired various counter values (random numbers), the value range (range parameter) to which each counter value (random number) belongs is specified (S412). Next, a random number range command is set to notify the range of values (range parameter) to which the specified counter value (random number) belongs (S413), and the process ends.

The random number range command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, it extracts range parameters corresponding to various counter values (random values) from the random number range command, and stores them in the slave random number table 222d, slave type table 222e, and slave type table 222e of the ROM 222. By comparing with the variation type table 222f, the lottery result based on the current starting prize is read in advance.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. First, command determination processing 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56. This command determination process 2 (4121) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33), and similar to the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33), This is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110 and executing the corresponding control.

Of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, each of the processes S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 correspond to the steps S4201 to S4216 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

In addition, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has not been received (S4209: No), then whether a random number range command has been received or not is determined. (S4221), and if it is determined that a random number range command has been received (S4221: Yes), read ahead based on the range of values to which various counter values belong (range parameter) notified by the random number range command. The random number range command process is executed (S4222), and this process ends. Details of this random number range command processing (S4222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4221, if it is determined that the random number range command process has not been received (S4221: No), the process moves to S4213. In the process of S4213, if it is determined that a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4213: Yes), stop command processing 2 is executed instead of the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). (S4223), and the process moves to S4215. Details of this stop command processing 2 (S4223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the random number range command process (S4222) that is executed when a random number range command is received in the above-described command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. As described above, this random number range command process (S4222) is a process for performing prefetching based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command.

In this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), first, the range parameters for each counter type notified by the random number range command are compared with the dependent random number table 222d, the dependent type table 222e, and the dependent variable type table 222f, respectively. (S4701). That is, the range parameter corresponding to the first winning random number counter C1 is stored in the secondary random number table 222d, the range parameter corresponding to the first winning type counter C2 is stored in the secondary winning type table 222e, and the range parameter corresponding to the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the secondary winning type table 222e. The lottery results are read in advance by comparing them with the subordinate variation type table 222f. Then, the prefetch result obtained by the process of S4701 is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4702).

Next, it is determined whether the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703), and if it is determined that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703: Yes), the preview lottery is prohibited, so points are stored. Processing for updating the points stored in area 223m is executed. Specifically, the point selection table 222c is read out (S4704). Then, the points corresponding to the prefetch results obtained by the process of S4701 are read from the point selection table 222c, and the read points are added to the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4705), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4703, if it is determined that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is off (S4703: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706). That is, it is determined whether the minimum number of reserved balls necessary for executing the continuous preview performance is reserved. In the process of S4706, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or less (S4706: No), this means that the minimum number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous preview performance is not reached, so continue with this process. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4706, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706: Yes), it means that the minimum number of reserved balls necessary for executing the continuous preview performance is reserved. Therefore, a process is executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the variation type specified from the range parameter notified by the current random number range command.

Specifically, first, the preview selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4707), and the variation type specified by the current pre-reading and the value of the performance lottery counter 223f are compared with the read preview selection table 222b. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed (S4708). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result in S4708 corresponds to the execution of a continuous preview performance (S4709), and if the continuous preview performance is not to be executed (S4709: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4709, if it is determined that a continuous preview performance is to be executed (S4709: Yes), first, the preview type flag 223k is updated according to the performance type of the preview performance specified from the preview selection table 222b ( S4710). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is read out (S4711), and the read counter value is set as the value of the advance notice counter 223i (S4712). Next, by comparing the data corresponding to the lottery results (fluctuation type) of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a with the point selection table 222c, the fluctuation type of each reserved ball is converted into points. (S4713). Then, the total value of points is stored in the point storage area 223m (S4714), the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4715), and this process ends.

This random number range command processing (see FIG. 57) allows accurate prefetch processing to be performed based on the range parameters notified by the random number range command.

Next, details of the above-mentioned stop command processing 2 (S4223) will be explained with reference to FIG. 58. As described above, this stop command processing 2 (S4223) is a process executed in place of the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

Of the stop command processing 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, each of S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 corresponds to S4401 to S4415 of the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 are executed.

Further, in the stop command processing 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, when the processing in S4404 is finished, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are then read out (S4421), and the read point is 0. (S4422). In the process of S4422, if it is determined that the read point is 0 (S4422: Yes), the held balls that are on hold include the held balls that are subject to determination as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. This means that there is no such thing, so this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S4422, if it is determined that the read value is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4422: No), the reserved ball corresponding to the variation type that is the target of determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance indicates that at least one is reserved, so first, calculate the average value (A) by dividing the points read from the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls (the value of the special symbol reserved balls counter 223b) ( S4423).

Next, by comparing the average value (A) calculated in the process of S4423 with the cancellation selection table 222g (see FIG. 54(c)), it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed (S4424), The process moves to S4411.

In addition, in the stop command processing 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4412 is completed, the holding area in which data corresponding to the holding balls with the expectation level corresponding to the average value range is stored is , the winning information storage area 223a is searched sequentially from the fourth pending area (S4425), and the process moves to S4414. For example, if the average value (A) is 1 or less, it means that the held ball contains at least one of the following: a special reach off, a super reach off, and a normal reach off. Starting from the 4th area, the reserved areas in which data corresponding to the variation type corresponding to the out-of-reach with reach are stored are searched.

In addition, in the stop command processing 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the processing in S4415 is completed, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are reset to 0 (S4426), and this processing is ended. do.

Next, details of the preview effect setting process 2 (S4521) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this preview effect setting process 2 (S4521). This preview performance setting process 2 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the preview performance setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for determining whether a continuous preview effect is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and if so, setting the preview effect.

Of the preview effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in this second embodiment, each process of S4601 to S4607 is different from each process of S4601 to S4607 of the preview effect setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the preview performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when the process in S4604 or S4607 is finished, the point selection table 222c is then read out (S4611), and the current execution is selected from the read table. The point corresponding to the variation type of the variation display to be started is specified (S4612). Then, the point specified in the process of S4612 is updated by subtracting it from the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4613), and this process ends. By executing this preview effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59), the points stored in the point storage area 223m can always be maintained at the total value of the points of the held balls.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, points are set according to the type of fluctuation, and the total value of points corresponding to one or more pieces of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is calculated. It is structured so that it can be understood. While the preview lottery is prohibited, the total points are updated every time a new winning information command is received, and when the preview lottery is disabled, the total points are suspended based on the total value of the points. The system is configured to grasp the type of variation included in the ball and determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. With this configuration, it is possible to determine from the point value whether there is a ball on hold that corresponds to the variation type that is the target of determining whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance, or the type of variation type that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. It can be easily identified. In addition, a comparison is made with a configuration in which, after the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the variation types of all the reserved balls are determined one by one, and it is determined whether or not continuous preview performances can be performed according to the determination results. By doing so, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of a starting winning in the main control device 110, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined. The configuration is such that the range parameter corresponding to the value range is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of acquired values without performing pre-reading. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the value of the range parameter notified by the random number range command output from the main controller 110, and performs pre-reading on the audio lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to execute. With this configuration, when a starting prize is detected, the main control device 110 compares each random value specified in various data tables with the counter value obtained this time to pre-read the lottery result. There is no need to execute any processing, and it is only necessary to compare the value range defined in the random number range selection table 202e with the currently acquired counter value, so the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming heavy in the main control device 110, which performs the main control related to the game, such as drawing a jackpot and updating the display mode of the first symbol, so that the main control related to the game can be performed reliably. It can be executed without delay. In addition, instead of outputting the counter value (random value) itself acquired based on the starting prize to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 converts the counter value (random value) into a value range to which it belongs. Since the configuration is such that even if a random number range command is illegally obtained from the outside, the random number that will be a jackpot (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) will be generated from the illegally obtained random number range command. It can be made difficult to predict. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts can be enhanced. In addition, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, based on the range of the notified counter value (random value), it is possible to execute pre-read processing corresponding to various counters, so the main control device 110 performs special symbol fluctuation start processing. (See FIG. 23) It is possible to execute pre-reading under conditions closer to those of the various lottery selections executed in (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the prefetch results.

In addition, in the present second embodiment, various counter values acquired when a new starting prize is detected are converted into range parameters and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, but this is not necessarily the case. No need to convert to range parameters. For example, prepare the same number of conversion parameters as the number of values that various counter values (random values) can take, so that there is a one-to-one correspondence between each value that various counter values can take and the value of the conversion parameter. It is also possible to configure the settings. Then, when various counter values are acquired based on the starting prize, the various counter values may be converted into conversion parameter values and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 may be provided with various data tables that define the correspondence between conversion parameters and lottery results. With this configuration, the lottery results can be pre-read on the voice lamp control device 113 side under conditions that are closer to the various lottery results executed on the main control device 110 side, so that pre-reading can be executed more accurately. can.

In the second embodiment, the range of values to which the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 that are acquired based on the starting winnings belong is specified by the random number range selection table 202e, Although the specified range is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, the type of counter to be controlled is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined.

In the second embodiment, the range to which various counter values obtained based on starting winnings belong is specified and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 using a random number range command, but information other than the range is specified. It may be configured to notify. For example, as a table to be compared with various counter values at the time of starting winnings, a data table in which random numbers and lottery results are associated with each other is prepared for each counter value, and various counter values are compared based on starting winnings. A configuration may also be adopted in which the lottery result corresponding to is specified and outputted to the audio lamp control device 113 by a command. With this configuration, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. In addition, in this case, there is no need to provide a dedicated data table that is referenced to identify the lottery results of various counter values at the time of starting winnings, and the data table used for executing special symbol lottery etc. at the start of fluctuation is shared. It may also be configured to be used in

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of cancellation is calculated, and the calculated logical sum data is calculated. The system was configured to determine the type of fluctuation contained in the reserved ball based on the following. Then, based on the determined variation type, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, during the preview lottery prohibited state, among the lottery results based on all reserved balls, the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation level and the lottery result with the highest expectation level It is configured to be able to store a holding area in which held balls corresponding to a result are held. This stored information is updated every time a prefetch result based on a new starting prize is notified by the winning information command. In other words, by comparing the type of lottery result (fluctuation type) based on a new starting prize with the type of lottery result that has already been memorized and has the highest expectation level, the expectation level indicated by the new lottery result is already If the expectation level is higher than the expectation level indicated by the highest expectation level among the stored lottery results, the type of lottery result based on the new winning information and the position of the holding area where the new winning information is stored are overwritten. It is structured as follows.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the audio lamp The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b)), the RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a high expectation type flag 223n and a high expectation level flag 223n. The difference is that a position storage area 223p is provided.

The high expectation type flag 223n is a flag indicating the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the lottery results (variation type) corresponding to each reserved ball. When the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is determined whether or not the variation type that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is suspended based on the state of the high expectation type flag 223n ( (See S4432 in FIG. 62). The correspondence between the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation level will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 60(b).

FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the state (value) of the high expectation level type flag 223n and the expectation level. As shown in FIG. 60(b), the high expectation type flag 223n has a configuration in which five types of states from 00H to 04H can be set. As shown in FIG. 60(b), the value "00H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "long deviation" and "short deviation", which are the variation types with the lowest expectation level, and "01H". ” corresponds to “out of normal reach” which is the variation type with the second lowest (fourth highest) expectation level. Furthermore, the value "02H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "super reach" which is the third lowest (third highest) variation type of expectation, and "03H" corresponds to the variation type with the third lowest (third highest) expectation. corresponds to the second-highest (fourth-lowest) fluctuation type, "Out of Special Reach."

The value "04H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "various wins" (special reach, super reach, normal reach) with the highest expectation. That is, in the third embodiment, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the expectation level is set to be the same regardless of the type of variation. This is intended to prevent the continuous preview performance from being interrupted due to a big hit occurring in the middle of the continuous preview performance. In other words, if the structure is such that the level of expectation differs between the types of fluctuations in jackpots, a starting prize corresponding to a jackpot of a type of fluctuation with a low level of expectation will occur first, followed by a jackpot of a type of fluctuation with a high level of expectation. When a starting winning occurs, a high expectation type flag 223n and a high expectation position storage area 223p, which will be described later, may be updated based on a jackpot of a fluctuation type with a high expectation. In other words, if multiple balls corresponding to jackpots are on hold at the time the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the jackpot suspension based on the starting winnings detected later in time will affect whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. There is a possibility that it will be subject to judgment. In this case, if it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance will be executed until the variable display of the jackpot based on the starting prize detected later in time. Even in the variable display of the jackpot based on the addition introduction award, a preview effect is set. Therefore, since the jackpot occurs after the variable display in which the variation starts earlier, the player may be misled into thinking that a continuous preview performance has been executed to notify the player of the jackpot. Therefore, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which no difference is made in the expectation level between the variation types corresponding to a jackpot, and a new starting prize corresponding to a jackpot is detected in a state where there are already reserved balls corresponding to a jackpot. However, the configuration is such that the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p, which will be described later, are not updated based on the variation type corresponding to the new starting prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where a jackpot occurs in the middle of a continuous preview performance and the continuous preview performance is restarted again after the jackpot, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where the continuous preview performance is restarted again after the jackpot hit, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where the continuous preview performance is restarted again after the jackpot hit, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where the continuous preview performance is restarted again after the jackpot hit. This allows the player to understand more clearly. Therefore, it is possible to realize an easier-to-understand presentation.

This high expectation type flag 223n is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). In addition, each time a winning information command is received (that is, each time a new starting winning is detected), the variation type indicated by the winning information command and the variation with the highest expectation level among the pending ones indicated by the high expectation level type flag 223n are displayed. If the expectation level of the variation type indicated by the winning information command is higher, the value of this high expectation level flag 223n is set to a new value corresponding to the expectation level of the variation type notified by the winning information command. (See S4324 in FIG. 61). Then, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted and it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance will be executed up to the variable display based on the data of the holding area indicated by this high expectation position storage area 223p. (See S4434 in FIG. 62).

Here, although illustration has been omitted, in the third embodiment, in addition to setting the expectation level of all fluctuation types that will be a jackpot to be the same ("04H"), the stipulated contents of the preview selection table 222b are also , Regarding the type of fluctuation that results in a jackpot, the configuration is such that a common determination value is referred to regardless of the type of fluctuation. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, when the variation type based on a new starting prize is "super reach hit", the determination value (see 222b2 in FIG. 13) used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance is In the third embodiment, all the variation types corresponding to the jackpot are used to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed.

Note that when the variation type based on the newly detected starting prize is the jackpot variation type, the determination value used to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the judgment value (222b3 in FIG. 13) used for judgment in the case of normal reach in the first embodiment is used, or a range of judgment values not specified in the advance notice selection table 222b in the first embodiment is used. It may also be a configuration. This increases the degree of freedom in design.

Returning to FIG. 60(a), the explanation will be continued. The high expectation position storage area 223p is stored in the position of the holding area where the variation type with the highest expectation (that is, the variation type of the expectation indicated by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n) among the held balls is held. This is a storage area for storing corresponding data. Specifically, if the holding area where the holding ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation level is held is the holding first area, "01H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, If it is the second reservation area, "02H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, and if it is the third reservation area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, If it is the fourth pending area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. This high expectation position storage area 223p is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance (that is, when the preview lottery is prohibited) (Fig. (See S4326 of 61 and S4436 of FIG. 62). In addition, each time a winning information command is received (that is, each time a new starting winning is detected), the variation type indicated by the winning information command and the variation with the highest expectation level among the pending ones indicated by the high expectation level type flag 223n are displayed. If the expectation level of the variation type indicated by the winning information command is higher, the value corresponding to the holding area where the data corresponding to the winning information newly notified by the winning information command is stored is higher. The expected degree position storage area 223p is overwritten (see S4325 in FIG. 61). When the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted and it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, the continuous preview performance will be executed up to the variable display based on the data of the holding area indicated by this high expectation position storage area 223p. (See S4434 in FIG. 62).

In this way, in the third embodiment, in the preview lottery prohibited state, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the lottery result with the highest expectation are stored. It is configured such that the reservation area that is currently in use can be determined by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. As a result, in determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance that is executed when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the continuous preview performance is simply determined based on the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the above, and there is no need to perform complicated control such as determining the variation types of all the held balls one by one, so the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to easily specify the holding area where data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation level is stored based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. , the processing for specifying the range of reserved balls for which continuous preview performance is to be performed can be realized by simpler control. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the processing load from when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted until the continuous preview performance is set.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61, winning information command processing 3 (S4231) in the third embodiment will be described.

Winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) is a process executed in place of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining the execution of continuous preview effects.

Of the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, each processing of S4301 to S4311 is different from each processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34). The same processing is performed. In addition, in the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n (S4321), and the expectation level indicated by the read high expectation level type flag 223n is compared with the expectation level of the variation type indicated by the received winning information command (S4322). Then, it is determined whether the expectation level corresponding to the variation type notified by the newly received prize information command has a higher expectation level (S4323), and the newly notified variation type has a higher expectation level. If it is determined that this is the case (S4323: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n is updated to a value corresponding to the expectation level of the variation type notified by the current winning information command (see FIG. 60(b)). (S4324).

After processing in S4324, the high expectation position storage area 223p is overwritten with a value corresponding to the type of pending area (any of pending areas 1 to 4) in which the data notified by the current winning information command is stored. (storage) (S4325), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4323, if it is determined that the expectation level of the newly notified variation type is less than or equal to the expectation level indicated by the high expectation level type flag 223n (S4323: No), each process of S4324 and S4325 is performed. Skip this and end this process.

In addition, in the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, after the process of S4310 is completed (that is, after setting the continuous preview effect), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation Both the position storage area 223p are reset to their initial values (S4326), and the process moves to S4311.

By executing this winning information command processing 3 (see Figure 61), every time winning information based on a new starting winning is received in the advance lottery prohibited state, all the winning balls including new reserved balls based on the winning information are It is possible to re-discriminate the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation level among the reserved balls and the reserved area in which it is stored. Therefore, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the type (type) of the lottery result (variable type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the reserved area where it is stored are set as the high expectation type flag. This can be easily determined based on the value (state) of 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from the time when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted until the setting of the continuous preview performance is completed, so that the process of setting the continuous preview performance can be executed more suitably.

Next, details of stop command processing 3 (S4232) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 62. The stop command process 3 (S4232) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), and is a process executed in place of the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). ), it is determined whether it is the timing to cancel the preview lottery prohibited state, and if it is the timing to cancel the preview lottery prohibited state, it is possible to execute the continuous preview performance based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls. This is a process for making a determination.

Of the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, each of the steps S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are different from the stop command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). The same processes as S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are executed. In addition, in the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4404 is completed, the high expectation type flag 223n is read out (S4431), and the value of the read high expectation type flag 223n ( status) is "00H" (S4432). In other words, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls that are the targets of determination as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed are not included.

In the process of S4432, if the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4432: Yes), the variation type with the highest expectation within the hold is "long miss" or "short miss", This means that the suspended ball that is the subject of determination as to whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed is not included in the hold, so the process is ended without executing the determination as to whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4432, if it is determined that the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is not "00H" (S4432: No), next, the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is "00H". 02H" or more (S4433), and if it is determined that it is "01H" (S4433: No), the reserved ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation is stored in the reserved first area. This means that the preview effect cannot be executed over a plurality of variable displays, so the process is ended immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S4433, if it is determined that the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is "02H" or more (S4433: Yes), the target is determined as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. This means that the variation type is included in the hold and that the change type is put on hold after the second hold area, so it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. Specifically, the preview selection table 222b is read (S4409), and the continuous preview performance is executed based on the read preview selection table 222b and the variation type corresponding to the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n. The possibility is determined (lottery) (S4434), and the process moves to S4411.

In addition, in the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the processing in S4412 is completed, the value stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is set as the value of the number of advance notice counters 223i (S4435 ), the high expectation type flag 223n, and the high expectation position storage area 223p are reset to the initial value "00H" (S4436), and the process moves to S4415.

By executing this stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62), when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, continuous preview effects are executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is possible. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, it is possible to easily specify the range of the holding area to be set for the continuous preview performance based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted until the setting of the continuous preview performance is completed.

Next, details of the preview effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The preview effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the preview effect setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), and is a process executed in place of the preview effect setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). (See FIG. 37), this is a process for determining whether a continuous preview effect is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and if so, setting the preview effect.

Of the preview effect setting process 3 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 63), each process of S4601 to S4607 is different from each process of S4601 to S4607 of the preview effect setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 is completed (that is, in the case of the fluctuation start timing during the advance notice lottery prohibited state), the next high It is determined whether the state (value) of the expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621), and if the value is other than "00H" (S4621: No), the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p is set to 1. It is updated by subtraction (S4622), and this process ends. As a result, the start of a new fluctuation display is set, and as the data in each holding area is shifted, the position (holding area) where the holding ball corresponding to the type of fluctuation with the highest degree of expectation is stored is set. The data shown (data in the highly expected position storage area 223p) can be updated. On the other hand, in the process of S4621, if it is determined that the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621: Yes), the process of S4622 is skipped and the process is directly ended. If the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H", check whether the prize information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) has been executed even once in the current preview lottery prohibited state, or whether the prize information command process 3 This means that the variation type corresponding to the new winning information has not been determined to have a higher expectation even once in the process of S4323 (see FIG. 61), so the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p This is because the initial value remains "00H".

By executing this advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63), every time the start of a new variable display is set in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p is stored as actual winning information. It can be updated by linking to the data in area 223a.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, during the preview lottery prohibited state, the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation level among the lottery results based on all reserved balls, and its The holding area in which the holding balls corresponding to the lottery results with high expectations are held is configured to be graspable by the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. There is. When the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored reservation area are classified into the high expectation type. The configuration is such that the determination is made based on the value (state) of the flag 223n and the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p.

With this configuration, when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. can. In other words, the process is simpler than the case where the variation type of each held ball is determined one by one from all the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the variation type with the highest expectation level is identified. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 221 when the preview lottery prohibited state is lifted. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance, it is possible to easily specify the range of the holding area to be set for the continuous preview performance based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. can. That is, the process of searching for the holding area in which data corresponding to the variation type that is the subject of determination as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is omitted, and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is simply searched. Since this can be replaced by a simple process of reading, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the range of reserved balls that are subject to continuous preview performance.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot is notified by the prize information command, and when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, a lottery corresponding to a jackpot is included in the reserved balls. In the case where the result is pending, the same judgment value is used to judge whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, regardless of the type of variation corresponding to the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which execution of the continuous notice performance is determined depending on the type of variation is varied depending on the type of variation.

In the third embodiment, based on two types of information: the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, consecutive Although the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the preview performance can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which only one of them is provided in the RAM 223 and the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined in conjunction with the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a. With this configuration, the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the winning information notified by the winning information command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area 223a, but the winning information storage area 223a may be deleted. Normally, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based only on the winning information notified by the winning information command, and in the state where the preview lottery is prohibited, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage This is because it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed when the preview lottery prohibited state is lifted based only on the data stored in the area 223p. By deleting the winning information storage area 223a, the capacity of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. In the above-described first embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice performance, a notice lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the continuous notice performance from being determined redundantly. . Then, when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of cancellation is calculated, and the continuous preview performance is executed based on the logical sum. It was configured to determine whether or not it was possible. In other words, based on the logical sum data, it is determined whether the suspended balls include the fluctuation type that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed, and which fluctuation type has the highest degree of expectation among the currently held balls. The configuration was such that it determines what type it is. If there is a variation type that is the target of determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, then it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed using the determination ratio (lottery probability) that corresponds to the variation type with the highest expectation level ( It was structured as a lottery.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to set the preview lottery prohibition state not only when it is decided to perform continuous preview performances, but also when a jackpot is achieved. Also, at the end of the jackpot, the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled, and the logical sum data is calculated and it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. As a result, it is possible to judge whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance by taking into account the variation types of all the pending balls that are being held at the end of the jackpot, so even if the held balls with higher expectations are being held. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous preview performance from being set based on the held balls with low expectations. Therefore, immediately after a jackpot ends, even though continuous preview effects are set for reserved balls with low expectations, continuous preview effects are not set for held balls with high expectations, and there are cases where continuous preview effects are not set for reserved balls with high expectations. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which held balls with high expectations are used up midway through, and held balls with low expectations are used up in the last variable display of the continuous preview presentation. Therefore, continuous preview effects can be suitably executed.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. It is. Regarding various electrical configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, a change over time in the lottery (judgment) state of the continuous preview performance after winning the jackpot in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, when a jackpot is won and the start timing of the jackpot (start timing of the opening period) is reached, a preview lottery prohibition state is set. As a result, during the jackpot, even if a starting prize is detected, a determination (lottery) as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed will not be executed. The example in FIG. 64 shows a case where two starting wins (win a and win b) are detected during a jackpot, but both when winning a and when winning b are detected, the notification is Since the lottery prohibition state is set, the determination as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the preview lottery prohibited state continues even during the ending period of the jackpot, and when the ending period ends (that is, when the jackpot ends), the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled. Ru. When the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the contents of the reserved balls that were reserved during the jackpot (win a and prize b) and the reserved balls that were already on hold at the time the jackpot started (variation type) Based on this, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. That is, in the same way as in the case where the advance lottery prohibition state in the first embodiment is canceled, the OR of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated, and the result with the highest expectation level is calculated. Identify the variation type. Then, based on the lottery probability (judgment ratio) corresponding to the type of variation with a high expectation level, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance by taking into account the variation types of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot, so that the more highly anticipated reserved balls are It is possible to suppress the execution of continuous preview performance from being set based on a suspended ball with low expectations even though it is on hold. If the configuration is such that during the execution of a jackpot, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed every time a starting prize is detected until the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided as in normal times, then the variation type with low expectations After it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance for the starting winnings, there is a possibility that a starting winning of a variable type with a high degree of expectation will be detected. In this case, the continuous preview performance that starts from the fluctuation immediately after the end of the jackpot continues until the variation type with low expectation level, and the fluctuation display with high expectation level is executed immediately after the end of the continuous preview performance, so the game There is a risk that the reliability of the continuous preview performance may be lowered. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the preview drawing is prohibited during the jackpot, so even if continuous preview effects are set for reserved balls with low expectations immediately after the jackpot ends, Regardless, there are situations in which continuous preview effects are not set for held balls with high expectations, or situations where a held ball with high expectations is consumed in the middle of a continuous preview effect, and a variable display at the end of a continuous preview effect shows that continuous preview effects are not set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the reserved balls are consumed. Therefore, continuous preview effects can be suitably executed.

Although the illustration has been omitted, if the continuous notice effect has already been set when the jackpot starts, the setting of the continuous notice effect should be cleared once when setting the state of prohibition of the notice lottery. It is structured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from ending with the settings of the continuous preview performance before the start of the jackpot remaining, so it is possible to more reliably prevent the jackpot from ending when the jackpot is won, and between the jackpot and the jackpot. It is possible to suitably determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance after the jackpot, taking into account all the types of fluctuations of the increased number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot start timing is reached, the settings for the continuous notice effect that were already set before the start of the jackpot are cleared, but the settings for the continuous notice effect are cleared. The timing for clearing is not limited to this, and can be determined arbitrarily. For example, the configuration may be such that the settings for the continuous preview performance are cleared based on the detection of the first starting prize in the jackpot. By configuring this way, for example, if a starting prize is not detected even once during a jackpot, the settings of the continuous preview performance before the start of the jackpot can be used as they are as the settings after the jackpot. In other words, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the wasteful process of determining whether or not continuous preview performances can be executed for the same reserved balls that were used before the start of the jackpot. The processing load on the lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. First, command determination processing 4 (S4131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 65. This command determination process 4 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Second, this is a process for performing control according to commands received from the main control device 110.

Of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, each of the processes S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are different from the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33). The same processes as S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that a status command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the gaming status is determined according to the gaming status indicated by the status command. Status command processing is executed to update the data in the storage area 223g (S4231), and this processing ends. Details of this status command processing (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing in the first embodiment ( (see FIG. 34), winning information command processing 4 is executed (S4232), and this processing is ended. The details of this winning information command processing 4 (S4232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. On the other hand, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether there is an opening command among the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4233). ), if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4233: Yes), first, the preview performance prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4234). As a result, it is possible to set the preview lottery prohibition state at the time when the jackpot opening period starts.

When the process of S4234 is completed, next, the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is reset to 0, and the notice type flag 223k is reset to the initial value "00H", thereby resetting the setting of the continuous notice effect. (S4235), a display opening command is set (S4236), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4233, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4233: No), the process moves to S4213.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that a stop command has been received in the process of S4213 (S4213: Yes), instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35), , executes a release determination process (S4237), and moves the process to S4215. This cancellation determination process (S4237) determines whether or not the preview lottery prohibited state has been canceled, and when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, it is possible to execute the continuous preview performance depending on the variation type of each reserved ball. This is a process for determining. The details of this cancellation determination process (S4237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, details of the above-mentioned status command processing (S4231) will be explained with reference to FIG. 66. As described above, this status command processing (S4231) is a process for updating the data in the gaming status storage area 223g according to the gaming status indicated by the status command.

In this status command processing (see FIG. 66), first, the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223g is updated according to the gaming status indicated by the received status command (S4801), and then the current status command is , it is determined whether or not it is a status command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the state command set by the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As described above, of the status command consisting of 1 byte of data, the lower two bits are data indicating the gaming status. In other words, the lowest bit is a bit indicating whether or not the time-saving state of the normal symbol is present, and the second least significant bit is a bit indicating whether the special symbol is in the variable probability state. In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined bit other than the lower two bits (for example, the most significant bit) is on, it indicates that the status command is output at the end of the jackpot, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot has been won. Indicates that this is a status command that was output at a time other than when exiting. That is, in the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, data of the lower two bits of the status command is set according to the gaming status after the jackpot, and a predetermined bit is set. Generate a state command with (eg, the most significant bit) set to on. Thereby, in the process of S4802, it is possible to easily determine whether the state command is output at the end of the jackpot simply by determining whether a predetermined bit (for example, the most significant bit) is on.

In the process of S4802, if it is determined that the status command is output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the jackpot, so the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4803 ), executes the above-described cancellation determination process (S4804), and ends this process. By setting the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4802, in the cancellation determination process (S4804), the held balls that were held at the start of the jackpot and the newly acquired held balls during the execution of the jackpot are Based on the variation type of the ball, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the cancellation determination process ( (see FIG. 68), it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. Thereby, the description of the control program can be simplified compared to a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed in a separate process depending on the trigger for canceling the preview lottery prohibited state. Therefore, the workload of the developer during development can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S4802, if it is determined that the status command received from the main controller 110 is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: No), each process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and This process ends.

Next, details of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 67. As described above, this winning information command processing 4 (S4232) is a process executed in place of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

Of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) in this fourth embodiment, each processing in S4301 to S4311 is the same as each processing in S4301 to S4311 in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Processing is executed.

In addition, in the winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S4301 is completed, a hold corresponding to a jackpot is placed before the starting winning that triggered the output of the current winning information command. It is determined whether the ball is already on hold (S4331). More specifically, the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the data in each hold area are read out, and at least one of the data corresponds to a jackpot (one of the following: per special reach, per super reach, per normal reach). ). That is, the logical OR of all the reservation areas other than the reservation area storing the data based on the current winning information command is calculated, and it is determined whether at least one of the upper three bits is on.

In the process of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot has already been reserved (one of the upper 3 bits of the logical sum is on) (S4331: Yes), the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot is reserved based on the current starting prize. Even if you set up a continuous preview performance that spans up to the ball, if you hit a jackpot midway through, the continuous preview performance will be reset, so the continuous preview performance will be half-finished (for example, if you set up a continuous preview performance that spans 3 times) (I thought I had set up a preview performance, but the first change turned into a jackpot, etc.) Therefore, in this case, the present process is ended without determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot is not reserved (S4331: No), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance based on the variation type indicated by the current winning information command. Each process from S4302 to S4311 is executed for this purpose.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, details of the above-described cancellation determination process (S4237, S4804) will be described. This cancellation determination process (S4237, S4804) is a process for determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed and the execution range based on the variation type of each reserved ball when the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled. . That is, this process corresponds to the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In addition, in the first embodiment, the timing at which the preview lottery prohibition state can be canceled is only the timing when a stop command is received, but in the fourth embodiment, the preview lottery can be canceled even when the jackpot ends. The configuration is such that the prohibited state is canceled. For this reason, the name of the process has been changed to "discrimination process upon release."

Of the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S4401 to S4415 is the same as each process from S4401 to S4415 of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. Processing is executed. In addition, in the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, when the process in S4403 is completed, the variable display being executed or the variable display to be executed next changes to notify a jackpot. It is determined whether it is displayed (S4441). More specifically, data in the execution area and the first pending area of the winning information storage area 223a are read out, and it is determined whether data corresponding to the jackpot variation type is stored in either area. In the process of S4441, if it is determined that data corresponding to the jackpot variation type is stored (S4441: Yes), even if continuous preview effects are set, the preview effects will be displayed continuously across multiple variable displays. This means that the player will win the jackpot and the settings for the continuous preview effect will be reset before it is executed. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4441, if it is determined that neither the variable display being executed nor the variable display to be executed next is a jackpot (S4441: No), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect and the execution range. Each process from S4404 to S4415 is executed to complete the process.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to set the preview lottery prohibition state not only when it is decided to execute continuous preview performances, but also when a jackpot is achieved. Also, at the end of the jackpot, the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled, and the logical sum data is calculated and it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. As a result, it is possible to judge whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance by taking into account the variation types of all the pending balls that are being held at the end of the jackpot, so even if the held balls with higher expectations are being held. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous preview performance from being set based on the held balls with low expectations. Therefore, immediately after a jackpot ends, even though continuous preview effects are set for reserved balls with low expectations, continuous preview effects are not set for held balls with high expectations, and there are cases where continuous preview effects are not set for reserved balls with high expectations. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which held balls with high expectations are used up midway through, and held balls with low expectations are used up in the last variable display of the continuous preview presentation. Therefore, continuous preview effects can be suitably executed.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68 ), it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. By configuring in this way, the description of the control program can be simplified compared to a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed in a separate process depending on the trigger for canceling the preview lottery prohibited state. can. Therefore, the workload of the developer during development can be reduced.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled at the end timing of the jackpot, and the suspended ball that was already on hold at the start of the jackpot and the hold based on the starting prize newly detected during the jackpot are canceled. Based on the variation type of each ball, it was configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance after the end of the jackpot, but the timing of canceling the preview lottery prohibited state and the timing of determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance are It is not limited to this. For example, a starting prize may be detected during a jackpot, and when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, the preview lottery prohibition state may be canceled and it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. Once the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, it is impossible for the number of reserved balls to increase after that (that is, the variation type with the highest expectation level will not change until the end of the jackpot), so a continuous preview performance will be performed at the end of the jackpot. This is because it is possible to obtain the same result as determining whether or not the execution is possible. With this configuration, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem such as a delay in the timing of starting the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 after the end of the jackpot.

In the fourth embodiment, the same situation occurs when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled based on the completion of the jackpot and when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled based on the completion of the continuous preview performance. Although the configuration is such that the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68) is executed, it is not necessary to execute the same process. Separate processing may be prepared. With this configuration, the processing can be different between when the jackpot ends and when the continuous preview performance ends, so the execution conditions of the continuous preview performance can be made different. This makes it possible to implement special control such as, for example, after the jackpot ends, execution of the continuous notice performance is only permitted if the game ultimately becomes a win. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the conditions for canceling the preview lottery prohibition state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment described above will be described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the preview lottery prohibited state is set during the jackpot, and the preview lottery inhibited state is canceled at the end timing of the jackpot to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance.

In contrast, in this modification, the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled at a predetermined timing (at the start of the ending period) during the jackpot, and it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. In the ending performance of the jackpot, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not the continuous preview performance will start after the end of the jackpot. As a result, when an ending performance with a high expectation level in which a continuous preview performance is executed, a continuous preview is displayed before the variable display of the third symbol starts on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make players have stronger expectations for the performance.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this modification of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in modification of fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 69(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the ROM 222 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment described above (the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)). ) is different from that in that an ending selection table 222h is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the fourth embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The ending selection table 222h is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the mode of the ending effect when the jackpot ending period starts. As described above, in this modification, the degree of expectation that the continuous preview performance will be executed after the end of the jackpot is indicated by the mode of the ending performance. In this modified example, the normal mode (the low-expected mode in which the continuous preview performance is executed) is set according to the determination result of whether or not the continuous preview performance is executed based on the ending period of the jackpot. ) or an ending performance in a special manner (a highly anticipated manner in which continuous preview performances are executed) is determined from the ending selection table 222h (see S4910 in FIG. 72).

The details of this ending selection table 222h will be explained with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 70, the ending performance selection table 222h includes the range of the value (random value) of the performance lottery counter 223f, which determines a normal ending with low expectations in which continuous preview performances are executed, and the range of values (random values) for continuous preview performances. A range of random numbers (counter values) for determining a preview suggested ending with a high degree of expectation to be executed is defined in association with each determination result of whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed and the preview type. Although not shown in the drawings, in the normal ending, the background color during the ending effect is set to blue, while in the preview-suggested ending, the background color is set to red. With this configuration, the player can easily identify whether the ending is a normal ending or an ending suggested by a preview just by checking the color of the background. Therefore, at the start of the jackpot ending period, the player can play the game with the expectation that the background will turn red.

As shown in FIG. 70, for "Notice effect A", "0 to 49" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the normal ending, and corresponds to the suggested ending of the notice. “50 to 99” is defined as a range of random numbers (counter values) (see 222h1 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if "Notice Effect A" is determined in the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect that is executed during a jackpot, the preview suggestion ending will be selected as the ending effect for the jackpot at a 50% ratio (50/100). is set.

In addition, for "Notice Effect B", "0 to 24" is defined as the range of random numbers (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and the range of random numbers (counter value) corresponding to the suggested ending ) is defined in association with "25 to 99" (see 222h2 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if "Notice Effect B" is determined in the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect that is executed during a jackpot, the preview suggestion ending will be selected as the ending effect for the jackpot 75% of the time (75/100). is set. For "Notice Production C", "0 to 9" is defined as the range of random numbers (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and the range of random numbers (counter value) corresponding to the suggested ending of the notice. The range "10 to 99" is defined in association (see 222h3 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if "Notice Effect C" is determined in the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect that is executed during a jackpot, the preview suggestion ending will be selected as the ending effect for the jackpot 90% of the time (90/100). is set.

On the other hand, if the continuous preview performance is not executed after the jackpot (if the continuous preview performance is not executed), "0 to 94" is defined as the corresponding random value (counter value) range, and the preview hint ending "95 to 99" is defined as a range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to (see 222h4 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if it is decided not to perform the continuous preview performance in the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance during the jackpot, only 5% (5/100) of the consecutive preview performances will be used as the ending performance of the jackpot. The hinted ending is not set.

In this way, in this modified example, when the continuous preview effect is not executed, the ratio of the preview suggestion ending being set as the ending effect is set to be extremely low (5%), so the preview suggestion ending is At the time of execution, expectations for the execution of the continuous preview performance can be improved. Moreover, in this modification, the determination ratio of the preview suggestion ending increases as the preview type with a high expectation of becoming a jackpot is determined. That is, in the case of "Preview Performance A", which has a relatively low level of expectation for a jackpot, the preview hint ending is determined 50% of the time, and "Preview Performance B", which has a higher expectation level for a jackpot, than "Preview Performance A". In the case of ``Preview Effect C'', the ending suggested by the preview is determined at a rate of 75%, and in the case of ``Preview Effect C'', which has the highest expectation of a jackpot, the ending suggested by the preview is determined at a rate of 90%. With this configuration, when the preview suggestion ending is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that "notice performance C" has been determined. That is, when the preview-suggested ending is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be further heightened, so that the player can pay more attention to the aspect of the ending presentation and play the game.

In addition, in this modified example, the background color during the execution of the ending effect is different between the normal ending and the ending suggested by the preview, but this is just an example. Any presentation mode can be used as long as it is distinguishable from the ending. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending may be different between the normal ending and the ending that suggests a preview (for example, in the normal ending, the characters ``See you!'' may be displayed, and the ending that suggests a preview) The character displayed during the ending may be different (e.g., a female character may be displayed during the normal ending, and a male character may be displayed during the preview ending). etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to making the normal ending different from the preview-suggested ending, but for example, the music played during the ending performance may be different, or the lighting By making the light emitting colors and light emitting patterns of parts 29 to 33 different, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the normal ending and the preview-suggested ending have different effects.

Further, in this modification, only two types of ending effects are provided, a normal ending and a preview-suggested ending, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a configuration in which four types of ending effects are provided, and one type is more likely to be selected when preview effect A is executed after a jackpot, and the other type is more likely to be selected when preview effect B is executed after a jackpot. , a type that is selected at a high rate when the preview effect C is executed, and a type that is selected at a high rate when the continuous preview effect is not executed may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous preview performance will be performed, but also the type of performance of the preview performance that is likely to be performed during the ending period, based on the mode of the ending performance. , it is possible to attract attention and play the game by the mode of the ending effect.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the RAM 223 in this modification has a configuration different from that of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment described above (same configuration as the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b))). , is different in that a judgment unexecuted flag 223q is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the fourth embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not it has been determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed at the start of the ending period. If the determination non-execution flag 223q is on, it indicates that the execution possibility of the continuous preview performance has not been executed at the start of the ending period, and if it is off, it indicates that the execution possibility of the continuous preview performance has been determined. .

Here, in this modification, only when the number of reserved balls has accumulated up to the upper limit (4) at the start of the ending period, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. If it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance when the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit, then a new starting prize is detected during the execution of the ending performance, and the variation type of the new starting prize is , if the expectation level is higher than the variation type of each held ball for which a continuous preview performance has already been set, a situation will occur in which a variation display with a high expectation level will be executed immediately after the continuous preview performance ends. .

Therefore, in this modified example, only when the number of reserved balls has accumulated up to the upper limit at the start of the ending period and there is no possibility that the status of the reserved balls will change during the ending period, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. It is configured to do this. If it is not determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed at the start of the ending period, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed at the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance by taking into account the variation types of all the pending balls that are on hold at the end of the jackpot, so the continuous preview performance can be suitably executed. be able to.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON when it is not determined whether the continuous preview performance can be executed at the start of the ending period (see S4908 in FIG. 73), and it is determined whether the continuous preview performance can be executed at the end of the jackpot. (See S4812 in FIG. 72).

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. First, details of command determination processing 5 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, and is a process executed in place of command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for performing control according to commands received from the main control device 110.

Of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, each of the processing in S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 performs the command determination in the fourth embodiment. The same processes as S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 of Process 4 (see FIG. 65) are executed.

Furthermore, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command has been received (S4209: Yes), the status command process in the fourth embodiment Instead of (see FIG. 66), status command processing 5 is executed (S4241), and this processing ends. Details of this status command processing 5 (S4241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

In addition, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4233 that the opening command is not included in the commands received from the main controller 110, ( S4233: No), it is determined whether there is an ending command among the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4242). In the process of S4242, if it is determined that an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4242: Yes), an ending command process is executed to select the mode of the ending effect (S4243), and the Finish the process. Details of this ending command processing (S4243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, details of the above-mentioned state command processing 5 (S4241) will be explained with reference to FIG. 72. This status command processing 5 (S4241) is similar to the status command processing in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 66), in which data in the gaming status storage area 223g is processed according to the gaming status indicated by the status command received from the main control device 110. This is the process for updating.

Of the status command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in this modification of the fourth embodiment, each of the processes S4801 to S4804 corresponds to each process of S4801 to S4804 of the status command processing (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment. The same process is executed.

In addition, in the state command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the current state command is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: (Yes), it is determined whether the determination unexecution flag 223q is on (S4811), and if the determination unexecution flag 223q is on (S4811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed at the start of the ending period. Since this indicates that it has not been executed, the determination non-execution flag 223q is set to OFF (S4812), and the processes of S4803 and S4804 are executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed, and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4811, if it is determined that the determination non-execution flag 223q is off (S4811: No), the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit at the start of the ending period, so it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. This means that the determination has already been made, so each process of S4812, S4803, and S4804 is skipped and the present process is ended.

By executing this status command processing 5 (see FIG. 72), even if it has not been determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed at the start of the ending period, it is possible to determine whether or not it can be executed at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in every jackpot, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not continuous advance notice performance can be executed according to the type of variation of the reserved balls that were reserved at the start of the jackpot and the number of reserved balls that increased during the jackpot.

Next, details of the above-mentioned ending command processing (S4243) will be explained with reference to FIG. 73. As described above, this ending command process is a process for selecting the mode of ending effect.

In this ending command process (see FIG. 73), first, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4901), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 (S4902). That is, it is determined whether the number of reserved pitches has reached the upper limit value. In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 4 (S4902: Yes), there is a possibility that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the variation type with higher expectation will increase during the ending period. Since there is no continuous notice performance, the processes of S4903 and S4904 are executed to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. That is, the advance notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is set to ON (S4903), a cancellation determination process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Note that this cancellation determination process is exactly the same as the cancellation determination process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 68), so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the counter value of the advance notice counter 223i is greater than 0. That is, in the cancellation determination process (S4904), execution of the continuous preview performance is determined, and it is determined whether a value corresponding to the number of consecutive preview performances has been set in the preview count counter 223i. In the process of S4905, if it is determined that the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is a value larger than 0 (S4905: Yes), the performance type of the continuous notice performance determined this time is specified from the state of the notice type flag 223k. (S4906), and compares the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the performance type specified in the process of S4906 in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70) with the value of the performance lottery counter 223f (S4907 ).

Next, based on the comparison result in the process of S4907, the ending type (either normal ending or preview suggested ending) corresponding to the value of the production lottery counter 223f is determined (S4910), and the determined ending type is notified to the display control device 114. An ending command for display is set for the display (S4911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 4 (S4902: No), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. , there is a possibility that a starting prize corresponding to the variation type with higher expectations will be detected during the ending period (execution of a continuous preview performance based on the variation type with the highest expectations pending at the end of the jackpot) Therefore, the determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON (S4908), and the process moves to S4909. Also, in the process of S4905, if it is determined that the value of the preview number counter 223i is 0 (that is, execution of the continuous preview effect has not been decided) (S4905: No), the process moves to S4909. .

In the process of S4909, the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to non-execution of continuous preview performances (see 222h4 in FIG. 70) in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70) and the counter value of the performance lottery counter 223f are selected. (S4909), the process moves to S4910, and the ending type is determined and the ending command for display is set, as in the case where it is decided to execute the continuous preview effect.

By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 73), it is possible to select the mode of the ending effect at a rate according to the determination result of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. It is possible to indicate whether or not the event will be executed and the level of expectation according to the type of notice.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled at a predetermined timing (at the start of the ending period) during a jackpot, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance. It is said that The configuration is such that it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation as to whether or not the continuous preview performance will start after the end of the jackpot depending on the manner of the ending performance of the jackpot. As a result, when the ending performance is executed in a highly anticipated manner in which a continuous preview performance is executed, the continuous preview performance is started before the variable display of the third symbol starts on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make players have stronger expectations for the performance.

Note that in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the background color during the execution of the ending effect is different between the normal ending and the preview-suggested ending, but this is just an example; Any presentation mode can be used as long as it is possible to distinguish between the ending and the ending suggested by the preview. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending may be different between the normal ending and the ending that suggests a preview (for example, in the normal ending, the characters ``See you!'' may be displayed, and the ending that suggests a preview) The character displayed during the ending may be different (e.g., a female character may be displayed during the normal ending, and a male character may be displayed during the preview ending). etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to making the normal ending different from the preview-suggested ending, but for example, the music played during the ending performance may be different, or the lighting By making the light emitting colors and light emitting patterns of parts 29 to 33 different, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the normal ending and the preview-suggested ending have different effects.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, only two types of ending effects are provided: a normal ending and a preview-suggested ending, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a configuration in which four types of ending effects are provided, and one type is more likely to be selected when preview effect A is executed after a jackpot, and the other type is more likely to be selected when preview effect B is executed after a jackpot. , a type that is selected at a high rate when the preview effect C is executed, and a type that is selected at a high rate when the continuous preview effect is not executed may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous preview performance will be performed, but also the type of performance of the preview performance that is likely to be performed during the ending period, based on the mode of the ending performance. , it is possible to attract attention and play the game by the mode of the ending effect. In addition, instead of or in addition to the above, the expectation that the jackpot will be included in the pending balls that were on hold at the end of the jackpot and the newly detected starting winnings during the jackpot is calculated in the ending performance. It may be a configuration suggested by the embodiment. Further, in this case, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation, a configuration may be provided in which an ending effect is selected only when a jackpot is included. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the aspect of the ending effect when playing the game.

In a modification of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit (4) at the start timing of the ending period, the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled and the execution of the continuous preview performance is determined. However, the timing for canceling the preview lottery prohibited state and the timing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance are not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that when a starting prize is detected during a jackpot and the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed even if it is not the start timing of the ending period. With this configuration, at the start timing of the ending period, it is only necessary to perform the process of selecting the mode of the ending effect, and the timing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous preview effect can be varied. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 at the start timing of the ending period can be reduced, so that the selection of the mode of the ending effect may be delayed, the execution of the ending effect may be delayed, or the execution of continuous preview effects may be delayed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the inability to normally select the mode corresponding to the determination result of availability.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. In the first embodiment described above, the board structure of the game board 13 (the arrangement of nails, the arrangement of windmills, etc.) is almost symmetrical, and the flow provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 is symmetrical. The game ball is launched by the game ball fired towards the channel (game ball hit to the right) and the game ball fired towards the channel provided on the left side (game ball hit to the left). The structure is such that the period from when the ball is played until it reaches the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is approximately the same.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the game ball fired toward the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 (the game ball hit to the right) is directed toward the left side. The game ball is configured so that it takes a longer period of time to reach the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 than a game ball fired toward the channel provided in the game ball (a game ball hit to the left). . In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the variable display unit 80 is more attractive than the game ball flowing down the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. It is configured such that the game balls flowing down the channel provided on the left side have a higher rate of entering the specific winning hole 65a.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in structure from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the board structure of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment is different from the board structure of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). On the right side of 80, there is provided a detour accessory 700 into which a play ball can enter. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, but this detour accessory 700 lengthens the time it takes for a right-handed game ball (launched to the right side of the game board 13) to reach the specific winning hole 65a. It is provided for. In other words, the detour accessory 700 is more effective until the game ball fired by right-hand hitting reaches the specific winning hole 65a than the period until the game ball fired by left-handed hitting reaches the specific winning hole 65a. The falling time of the game ball hit to the right can be made longer so that the time of . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the game ball hit to the left reaches the specific winning hole 65a is 1 second to 2 seconds, whereas the game ball hit to the right reaches the specific winning hole 65a. The configuration is such that the period until reaching the point is 7 to 8 seconds.

Here, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the detour accessory 700 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 75, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at its upper part. A game ball fired by right-handed hitting can enter the inside of the detour accessory 700 through this opening 710. Furthermore, an opening 720 is provided at the lower part of the detour accessory 700 for discharging the game ball that has flowed down inside the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700. Furthermore, in order to prevent the ball that has progressed inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the bypassing accessory 700 has a peripheral edge 730 that allows it to be blocked in the front side, the back side, and in the left and right directions when viewed from the front. is surrounded on four sides. Since this peripheral portion 730 is made of a semi-transparent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily see how the ball flows down.

In addition, since the peripheral part 730 can be assembled so that the plane on the rear side when viewed from the front is substantially flush with the base plate 60, a gap is created between the peripheral part 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the ball from getting caught in the gap. Further, since the front surface of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured to contact each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured to contact each other without a gap. By creating a gap between them, it is possible to prevent the ball from getting caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, inside the detour accessory 700, a plurality of flow paths (guiding flow paths 740 to 790) are provided that are inclined downward of the detour accessory 700. In each of the guiding channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere comes into contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and its width is the width of the inner part of the peripheral edge 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view and the inner wall on the near side in front view). (distance between the two). That is, by creating a gap between the inner portion of the peripheral portion 730 and each of the guide channels 740 to 790, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, the guide channels 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Further, the guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Guidance channels 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, and 790 are arranged in this order from above the detour accessory 700. That is, flow paths that slope downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and flow paths that slope downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front are alternately provided.

The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guide channel 740, and flows down toward the lower left in a front view along the slope formed by the guide channel 740. When the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the fallen game ball flows down along the guide channel 750 to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball that has flown down reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls into the guide channel 760, and flows down toward the lower left in the front view along the slope formed by the guide channel 760.

Thereafter, the game ball alternately repeats the motion of flowing down along the channel and the motion of falling into the channel below. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guiding channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guiding channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that entered the detour accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720. Every time the flow path through which the game ball flows changes, the direction in which the game ball flows down changes (i.e., from the lower right to the lower left, or from the lower left to the lower right), so the game changes every time the flow path changes. It is possible to reduce the downward momentum (flowing speed) of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball that enters the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, compared to firing a game ball to the left side of the game board 13, when the ball is fired to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is released from the lower part of the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64 or the variable prize winning hole). The time taken to reach the area where the device 65 is installed can be increased (to 7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the guiding channels 740 to 790 is supported by channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise around each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is such that the lower surface of each of the guiding channels 740 to 790 is rotated relative to the rotating stop members 742a to 792a provided below each of the guiding channels 740 to 790, or the rotating stopping members 742b to 792b. Stops on contact. This rotational movement will be explained by taking the guide flow path 740 as an example.

As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotational movement is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guiding channel 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, causing the upper half of the guide channel 740 to flow downward. A force is generated in the direction of rotation. That is, since a force acts in a direction that rotates the guide channel 740 clockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotational movement is stopped when the lower surface of the guiding flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stopper member 742b. This rotation stopping member 742b can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much clockwise and causing the inclination of the guide flow path 740 to become reversed.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral portion 730, respectively. In other words, the configuration is such that the lower surface of the guiding flow path 740 does not shift its position due to an impact when it comes into contact with the lower surface. Note that the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and rotation stop members 752b to 792b have the same structure as the rotation stop member 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guiding channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guiding channel 740, so the lower half of the guiding channel 740 is rotated downward. A directional force is generated. That is, since a force acts in a direction that rotates the guide channel 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotational movement is stopped when the lower surface of the guiding flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stopper member 742a. This rotation stopping member 742a can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide flow path 740 from becoming too large, which makes it impossible to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball fired by right-handed hitting can be reliably flowed down the game board 13 for 7 seconds or more (the area where the first ball entry port 64 and the specific winning port 65a are arranged). . In addition, each guide channel 740 to 790 is arranged so that when the game ball flows down with the maximum inclination, it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640. A path length of 740 to 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for a game ball to flow down while all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintain the maximum inclination angle, the time for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 is ensured to be 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, the speed of the game ball flowing down each guide channel 740 to 790 can be varied. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time it takes for the game ball to finish passing through the detour accessory 700. Further, in the above description, a case has been described in which one ball travels on the guide channel 740, but during an actual game, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls advance on the same guide channel. In this case, since the rotational movement of each guide channel 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, the time it takes for the game ball to finish passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners at both left and right ends of the bottom surface are rounder than the corners at both left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each of the guide channels 740 to 790 rotates, it is possible to make it difficult for the corners of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall portion of the peripheral edge portion 730. Therefore, each of the guiding channels 740 to 790 can be arranged closer to the peripheral edge 730, so a gap is created between each of the guiding channels 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge 730, and the game ball is placed in the gap. It is possible to prevent the game balls from getting caught or the game balls from passing through the gaps. In addition, each guide flow path 740 to 790 is configured to return to the position with the largest inclination due to its own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. For example, when the ball is not flowing down the guide channel 740, due to the weight of the guide channel 740, the ball rotates counterclockwise in front view about the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. This rotational operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide flow path contacts the rotation stopper 742a, and is stopped by contacting the rotation stopper 742a. Similarly, the guide channels 750 to 790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with the respective rotation stop members 752a to 792a due to their own weight in a state where the game balls are not flowing down. As a result, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guiding channels 750 to 790 is performing the rotational operation, or the game ball flows down after the rotating operation of each of the guiding channels 750 to 790 is completed. The velocity of the ball can be varied accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to aim at the second ball entry opening 640.

It should be noted that each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured so that it does not rotate under its own weight, but rotates only when a game ball passes through it. Further, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 74, the explanation will be continued. As shown in FIG. 74, below the detour accessory 700, there are many nails so as to restrict the downward direction of the game balls flowing out from the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour accessory 700. is located. These nails allow all the game balls flowing out of the detour accessory 700 to fall onto the curved member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the first ball entrance 64 It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen onto the curved member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 800 and is guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 74, the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved member 800 is very narrow (less than the width of one game ball), so when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the curved member Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be won (balls entered) into the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, there is a relatively wide space (width greater than one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the outlet 66 below the variable winning device 65. (flow path) is provided. For this reason, when the specific winning hole 65a is open and a game ball is fired by hitting to the left, many game balls will enter the specific winning hole 65a, but some game balls (for example, 10 One ball per ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out port 66 without entering the specific winning hole 65a.

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the channel on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. With these, the period until the game ball hit to the right reaches the specific winning hole 65a can be made longer than the period until the game ball hit to the left reaches the specific winning hole 65a. Basically, it takes longer for right-handed players to reach the specific winning hole 65a, but depending on the direction of reflection of the game ball, the ejection situation, etc., it is better for left-handed players to reach the specific winning hole 65a. There is also a non-zero possibility that it will take a long time to reach the ball (for example, if a game ball fired to the left temporarily stops, or if a ball becomes clogged in the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80) etc). Therefore, the game ball that has flown down (passed) the channel on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 takes a longer period of time to reach the specific winning opening 65a compared to the game ball that has flown down (passed) the channel on the left side. can be said to be more likely to become longer (the game ball that flows down the left channel tends to have a shorter period of time until it reaches the specific winning hole 65a).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the rate at which a right-handed game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a is lower than the rate at which a left-handed game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. This can be higher than the percentage of balls entering the field. As a result, for players who want to speedily advance jackpot games (want to finish jackpot games early), it is possible to avoid some losses (waste of about 1 out of 10 balls) while playing jackpot games. The player can play the game aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting the ball to the left, while being prepared for the ball. On the other hand, for players who do not want to waste balls (losses) as much as possible, they play the game aiming at the specific prize opening 65a by hitting right, with the understanding that the period of the jackpot game will be longer. can be set. Therefore, each player can select his/her favorite gameplay while playing a jackpot game, and therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that suits each player's preference. In addition, each round of the jackpot ends when 30 seconds elapse after the start of each round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds elapse. be done. Even if you start firing the game balls by right-handed hitting after each round of the jackpot has started, 10 game balls will pass through the detour accessory 700 before 30 seconds have passed and the special prize opening 65a will be fired. (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, when hitting right, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage in terms of winning balls (the round ends before the specified number of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR2 and HR3 are formed on the upper left side and the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. , display region HR2, and display region HR3, there is formed a display region HR4 that has a substantially rectangular shape and has a larger area than display regions HR2 and HR3. In the display area HR2, an image imitating a leftward arrow is displayed, as well as the words ``Left-handed hit high speed mode'' and the words ``You can quickly digest the jackpot.'' These display contents make it easy for players to understand that if they hit left-handed during a jackpot, they can finish the jackpot in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed). Can be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 76, an image imitating a rightward arrow is displayed in the display area HR3, along with the words ``Slow speed mode when hitting right'' and the message ``You can slowly digest the jackpot.'' The characters are displayed. These display contents make it easy for players to understand that if they hit right during a jackpot, the jackpot will take a relatively long time to complete (the jackpot will progress at a relatively slow speed). can be done.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 76, various images and information indicating that a jackpot is in progress are displayed in the display area HR4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, an image TB imitating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the center of the display area HR4, and an image TB " A display area HR6 labeled with the words "Jackpot" is formed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot game is being executed. Furthermore, a display area HR5 for displaying characters indicating the progress status of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed on the upper left side inside the display area HR4. In the example of FIG. 76, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" (information showing the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds Information indicating the comparison between the number of pieces to be paid out and the maximum number of pieces to be paid out is displayed. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR5 allow the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the rate at which a right-handed game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a is lower than the rate at which a left-handed game ball enters the specific winning hole. The configuration is such that the percentage of balls entering the ball is higher than the percentage of balls entering the ball 65a. With these configurations, players who want to play jackpot games quickly (want to win a large amount of prize balls in a shorter period of time) can avoid some losses (1 out of 10 balls) while playing jackpot games. While being prepared for a certain percentage of wasted balls, the player can play the game by hitting left-handed and aiming at the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, for players who do not want to waste balls (losses) as much as possible, they can play the game by hitting the right hand and aiming for the specific prize opening 65a, with the understanding that the period of the jackpot game will be longer. can be made to do so. Therefore, each player can select his/her favorite gameplay while playing a jackpot game, so it is possible to realize a gaming experience that suits each player's preference.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball launched by right-handed hitting reaches the variable prize winning device 65 can be reduced compared to left-handed hitting. The game ball is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball launched by the player reaches the variable prize winning device 65. In other words, by making the path length of a game ball launched by right-handed ball running down longer than the path length of a game ball launched by left-handed batting, it is easier to hit left-handed ball by hitting right-handed. Although the configuration was such that the flow time was longer than the time required for striking, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a known croon means may be provided instead of the detour accessory 700. With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period from when the ball reaches the croon means to when it passes through the croon means, so it is possible to lengthen the falling time of the game ball fired by right-handed hitting. Further, for example, instead of the detour accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of game balls for a predetermined period may be provided in the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, or By configuring the right side of the game board 13 with a material having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side (for example, an elastic body such as rubber), the falling speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 will be lower than that of the base plate 60. The structure may be such that the speed is easily decelerated by friction. Furthermore, instead of the detour accessory 700, by making the placement of nails different between the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, it is possible to It may be configured such that the period until the ball reaches the lower area on the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) is longer than when the ball flows down the path.

In the fifth embodiment, on the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot, the playability when hitting the left hand and the playability when hitting the right hand are shown in the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, respectively. Although the configuration is such that the information is displayed on the screen, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a jackpot, only an image that encourages left-handed hitting may be displayed, or only an image that encourages right-handed hitting may be displayed. By displaying only the image that encourages left-handed hitting, the jackpot can be completed in a short time, and a large amount of prize balls can be won in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest. In addition, by displaying only the image that encourages hitting to the right, it is possible to reduce wasted balls (game balls that enter the out hole 66 without entering the specific winning hole 65a). It is possible to further increase the player's profit when winning the jackpot.

Furthermore, when notifying the player of the firing direction during a jackpot, the firing direction to be notified may be different depending on the type of jackpot, the type of performance performed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability-variable jackpot, a variable display performance in which the main symbols with odd numbers (probability-variable symbols) are aligned (a production mode that is executed only when a probability-variable jackpot occurs) is executed. The structure is such that it is determined by lottery whether to perform a variable display performance (a performance mode that is always executed when a jackpot is usually achieved) in which main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are arranged. Then, if it is a normal jackpot or a probability-variable jackpot, and if a production in which the regular symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, a production is executed to notify whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot during the jackpot. . In this case, the production mode for notifying whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot (for example, a production mode in which it is not known whether it is a probability-variable jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, and a production mode that notifies you immediately at the end of the first round) (i.e., an operating method such as a button or a lever that the player can operate) The selection of the performance mode may be performed in the first round. In order to ensure longer time for selecting the performance mode, in the first round of the jackpot announced by the fluctuating display performance where the normal symbols are aligned (the jackpot of the normal symbol notification), a structure that suggests a right-handed hit is used. You can also use it as By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure a longer period for allowing the player to select the performance mode, so that the player can be made to select the desired performance mode more reliably. On the other hand, if the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, if a jackpot is announced by a variable display performance in which probability-variable symbols are aligned), a configuration may be adopted in which a left-handed hit is notified during a jackpot. . With this configuration, the period until the end of the jackpot can be shortened, so a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, for example, when it is a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot, and a production in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, a production is executed to notify whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot in the first round of the jackpot. In the performance, a performance (operation performance) that prompts the user to operate the operating means may be performed. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a push button that can be pressed by the player is provided as the operation means, and an effect is performed that prompts the player to press the push button continuously within a predetermined period of time. The display mode is configured to change depending on the number of presses on the push button (for example, the gauge of the indicator accumulates), and the display mode changes to a specific display mode in conjunction with the presses (for example, the gauge increases). It is also possible to have a configuration in which a probability variable jackpot is notified by accumulating the indicator to the maximum value. In this case, if it becomes a normal jackpot or a variable jackpot, and if a performance in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery (if the operation performance is executed), a right hit will be notified in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period for performing operation effects can be secured. Therefore, the performance effect of the operation performance can be further enhanced. On the other hand, if there is a probability-variable jackpot, and if a performance in which the probability-variable symbols are aligned is determined by lottery (if the operation production is not executed), the jackpot will be announced by notifying the left-handed hit in the first round. The period until completion can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short period of time.

In addition, instead of letting you select the performance mode when notifying you of whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot, for example, in the first round, you can select the type of music (audio production) that is played during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be selectable and to notify at least right-handed hitting during a period for selecting a song (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (audio production) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On this music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) music pieces set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be provided with operating means such as buttons that can be operated by the player in place of or in addition to the frame button 22, and the music selection menu screen is displayed in accordance with the operation content of the operating means. The configuration is such that one image in the list can be selected. For example, on the song selection menu screen, images corresponding to each song are arranged in a vertical line, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) appears lit, and the other images appear unlit. Configure it as follows. In addition, the configuration includes three types of buttons as operation means: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to decision operation (decision button). do. Then, by detecting a press on the upper button during the song selection period, the image that was lit up until just before the press was pressed changes to an unlit image, and the image placed one position above changes to a lit appearance. (The image that looks like it is lit will move up by one position.) Similarly, when a press on the lower button is detected, the image that appears to be lit is moved downward by one position. Furthermore, by detecting the depression of the determination button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that appears to be lit at the time of depression is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. That is, the music is set to be played from the end of the first round until the end of the final jackpot round. With this configuration, the player's favorite music can be played during the jackpot game, so the player's interest in the game can be further improved during the jackpot game.

Under such circumstances, if a configuration is adopted in which left-handed hitting is reported in the first round of a jackpot, the first round will end relatively early, and the song selection period will also be shortened. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects his/her favorite music by operating the upper and lower buttons and sets the playback by pressing the enter button. On the other hand, by configuring a structure in which a right-handed hit is notified during the first round (music selection period) of a jackpot for which a music selection period is set (a jackpot for which execution of a performance that selects a song is decided), one round Since the eye round period can be made relatively long, players can search for their favorite song from the song selection menu screen (operate the up and down buttons so that the corresponding image appears lit). It is possible to secure a longer period for making a decision (pressing the decision button). This allows the player to reliably select his/her favorite song without making the player feel anxious, thereby increasing the convenience of the player when selecting a song. In addition, by having a configuration that notifies players of left-handed hits during the first round of jackpots for which no music selection period is set (jackpots in which a normal jackpot effect is executed), it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and to speed up play. It is possible to play a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction depending on the performance mode performed during the jackpot.

Furthermore, when a performance (operation performance) that prompts the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the event of a jackpot, the player's past The firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed depending on the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player performed an operation on the operating means in the first round of a jackpot in which an operation effect was set. When starting a jackpot for which an operation performance is set, based on the past operation history that has been stored, the game can be played for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) for the jackpot for which the operation performance has been set. If the player has not performed an operation, the player may be informed of a left-handed hit, while if the player has performed an operation within a predetermined number of jackpots, the player may be notified of a right-handed hit. In other words, for players who tend not to perform operations even when the operation effect is performed, by notifying them that they are hitting left-handed, the first round of jackpots can be ended earlier, thereby allowing them to receive a large amount of prize balls in a short time. While realizing the gameplay that can be acquired, for players who tend to actively perform operations during the operation presentation, by notifying them that they are hitting right, the execution period of the operation presentation is extended, and the player It is possible to secure a period for performing sufficient operations on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that corresponds to the player's tendency.

In the fifth embodiment, by adopting a board configuration in which the probability of the ball entering the specific prize opening 65a is higher when hitting the right ball than when hitting the left hand ball, the player hitting the right hand has a higher winning pitch. Although this is a configuration that gives a slight advantage to right-handed hitters, the configuration for giving right-handed hitters an advantage in terms of winning pitches is not limited to this. For example, instead of setting the proportion of game balls fired by right-handed players and game balls launched by left-handed players to be the same when entering the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to A general prize opening with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball hit to the right to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right can enter the ball. That is, in a state where the specific winning hole 65a is open, a game ball hit to the left basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some game balls fail to enter the specific winning hole 65a and are out. While flowing down to the opening 66, the game ball hit to the right basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some game balls may enter the general winning hole. With this configuration, when you hit right-handed, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning hole will be the prize ball obtained by hitting the jackpot (that is, the prize ball obtained by hitting the game ball into the specific winning hole 65a). Since it is awarded in addition to the prize ball (by prize ball), it is possible to make it more advantageous in terms of the prize ball if you hit right-handed during a jackpot. Therefore, a player who wants to win more prize balls can be asked to hit right-handed, with the understanding that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, for players who wish to obtain a prize ball for a jackpot in a shorter period of time, it is possible to have the player hit left-handed during a jackpot, with the understanding that the prize ball will be at a slight disadvantage compared to hitting right-handed. I can do it.

In the fifth embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the characteristics of the right-handed hit and the left-handed hit are displayed in the display areas HR2 and HR3 (see FIG. 76). ), but is not limited to this. For example, a sensor that can detect whether the player is playing to the right or to the left is located at a predetermined location on the game board 13 (for example, in the left channel of the variable display unit 80 and in the middle of the right channel). It may be configured such that a detection means such as the above is provided, and the direction in which the player is shooting the game ball is determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, it may be configured to vary the performance during the jackpot depending on the determined firing direction. For example, when a right-handed player is detected, the display area HR2 is turned off and the display area HR3 is lit, while when a left-handed player is detected, the display area HR2 is lit and the display area HR3 is turned on. It may be configured to appear as if the light is off. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of gameplay will be achieved depending on the firing direction that the player has selected.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 89. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, rather than when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. When the ball flows down, it takes longer to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged). It comprised the path length of the flow path, the direction of flow of the game ball, etc. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open (that is, during the execution of a jackpot game), the game ball is fired by hitting the right hand more than when firing the game ball by hitting the left hand. The game board 13 has a board configuration such that when a ball is fired, it is easier to win (ball) into a specific winning hole 65a at a higher rate.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right variable winning device 650 is provided as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during a jackpot. The right specific winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can enter in the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, the special symbol probability change state after the jackpot ends. Granted. On the other hand, the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when game balls enter. In addition, the right specific winning hole 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when the ball is hit left-handed and when the game ball is hit right-handed. If you continue to do so, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 will increase while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a state where the balls can enter, but the proportion of arriving game balls that enter the right specific winning hole 650a will decrease. is configured to be low. On the other hand, if you continue to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 will decrease while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a state where balls can enter, but the number of game balls that have reached the It is configured such that the percentage of balls entering the right specific winning hole 650a is high. With these, it is possible to vary the gameplay in the first round of the jackpot depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched. Instead, the player can select either a game feature in which the number of game balls that reach the target is increased, or a game feature in which the number of game balls that reach the target is small but the ball entry rate is high.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in terms of configuration, in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. , the configuration of the RAM 203 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the sixth section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the sixth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 77, in the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment, a curved surface member 810 is provided in place of the curved surface member 800 provided on the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 74). They are different in that they are As shown in FIG. 77, a right variable prize winning device 650 is arranged on a part of the slope of this curved surface member 810.

The right variable winning device 650 is provided with a horizontally elongated rectangular right specific winning opening 650a approximately in the center thereof. This specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by the opening/closing door 650f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed by the opening/closing door 650f1. It opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern each time. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, a state in which the ball can enter the right specific winning hole 650a and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball are switched according to a specific switching pattern. If the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a while the opening/closing door 650f1 is open (while the ball can enter the right specific winning port 650a), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot will change. , the special symbol is set to a variable probability state, and the normal symbol is set to a time saving state (the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON when the jackpot ends). On the other hand, if the game ball never enters the right specific winning hole 650a in the first jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state. is set (100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203f). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a than if the game ball never enters the right specific winning hole 650a during a jackpot. (The gaming state after the jackpot ends will be advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 77, the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810, so the game ball that passes through the detour accessory 700 and falls onto the curved member 810 By rolling along the upper surface of the curved member 810, it can easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the left end of the upper surface of the curved member 810 and the left end of the right specific winning opening 650a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. Further, the curved surface member 820 provided below the left channel of the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on its upper surface is higher than the height of the left end under the condition of the curved surface member 810. . As shown in FIG. 77, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810 so as to form a downward slope from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. With these configurations, when a game ball that is hit to the left and passes through the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 820 and hits the curved member 820. Reach the far right. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right side in the front view flows down to the lower right direction in the front view while interfering with the nail planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved member 810. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved member 810 from the left side of the curved member 810 can easily reach the right specific prize opening 650a by rolling the upper surface of the curved member 810 in the right direction when viewed from the front. Can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the right variable winning device 650 regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. Therefore, in the first round of jackpot, the game ball can be launched in the desired direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the structure of the right variable prize winning device 650 will be described in more detail. FIG. 78(a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed (a state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a). FIG. 78(b) shows the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 being switched from a closed state to an open state (switching from a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a to a state in which it is possible to enter the ball). It is a front perspective view of the right variable prize winning device 650 in a state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, the left end of the opening/closing door 650f1 that closes the right specific winning opening 650a and the right variable winning device on the upper surface of the curved member 810 The portion to the left of 650 (left floor surface 810b) is connected smoothly with almost no difference in level. On the other hand, on the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1, there is a convex portion 650g1 for suppressing a game ball that has rolled from the left side when viewed from the front from passing through the top surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 and rolling to the right. It is provided. Since this protrusion 650g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the door 650f1, the game ball that has rolled on the door 650f1 from the left side of the door 650f1 is prevented from rolling by the protrusion 650g1. The movement stops. As shown in FIG. 78(a), the top surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in front view, so the game ball whose rolling is prevented by the convex portion 650g1 can be opened/closed. The upper surface of the door 650f1 flows downward toward the lower left when viewed from the front. Then, it rolls leftward on the left floor surface 810b in the front view and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the outlet 66. In addition, the game balls that have flowed down from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) have a strong flowing force due to the slope of the right floor surface 810, so the game balls cannot be opened or closed by the opening/closing door. In the state where 650f1 is closed, the water can flow down to the direction of the outlet 66 over the convex portion 650g1. In this way, by arranging the right variable prize winning device 650 at an angle, it is possible to suppress the game balls from accumulating at the top of the opening/closing door 650f1 during the period when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and to prevent the game balls from accumulating at the top of the opening/closing door 650f1, and to prevent the game balls from accumulating at the top of the opening/closing door 650f1. It can be flowed down.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right specific winning hole 650a switches to the state where the ball can enter, the opening/closing door 650f1 that was blocking the upper part of the right specific winning hole 650a, The opening/closing door 650f1 is opened by sliding to the left when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 78(b), while the opening/closing door 650f1 is being opened, the game ball that has rolled from the right side in front view can enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but the ball can roll from the left side in front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 650g1 and becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning hole 650. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b will be at almost the same height (they will be connected almost smoothly). Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the flowing direction of the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 will be explained when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed and when it is opened. . First, FIG. 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 79(a), when the door 650f1 is completely opened, the height of the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 provided at the right end of the door 650f1 is approximately the same as the left floor surface 810b. Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left direction when viewed from the front with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can easily pass through the convex portion 650g1. That is, it is possible to easily enter (win) the ball into the right specific winning opening 650a without being hindered by the convex portion 650g1. In addition, regarding the game ball that has rolled from the right direction in front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a), there are also things that prevent the ball from entering (winning) into the right specific winning opening 650a. Since there is no ball, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right specific winning hole 650a.

FIG. 79(b) is a sectional view of the right variable prize winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the opening/closing door 650f1, so the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction when viewed from the front with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is subjected to gravity in a downward direction to the lower left direction due to the upward slope in the upper right direction formed by the opening/closing door 650f1. Therefore, the rolling momentum is reduced. In addition, since the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1 is provided with a convex portion 650g1 that protrudes above other parts of the opening/closing door 650f1, if the force of rolling toward the right is strong and the opening/closing door 650f1 is almost Even if it is possible to climb up, the convex portion 650g1 prevents the user from reaching the right floor surface 810a side. Therefore, it flows down to the lower left along the slope of the opening/closing door 650f1, and falls from the left end of the curved member 810 toward the outlet 66.

On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction in front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is in a state where sufficient momentum is added to it to overcome the convex portion 650g1 due to the slope formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to climb over the convex portion 650g1 and pass through the opening/closing door 650f1. Thereby, the curved surface member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the outlet 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 (right specific winning opening 650a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the sixth embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, there are two jackpot types (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning hole 650a is set to a state in which the ball can be entered for a relatively long period, and a jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning hole 650a is set to a state where the ball can be entered for a relatively short period. A jackpot type (jackpot B6) that is set to a possible state is provided. As the state in which the ball can be entered becomes longer, there are more opportunities for the game ball to enter the right specific winning hole 650a, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is an advantageous state (probability change state for special symbols and time saving for normal symbols). state) is more likely to be set. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A6 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B6 (the gaming state after the jackpot is likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, in order to simplify the explanation, the opening pattern of the right specific winning hole 650a set in the first round of jackpot A6 will be referred to as the opening pattern that allows V winnings, and the opening pattern of the right specific winning hole 650a set in the first round of jackpot B6 will be referred to as the opening pattern that allows for V winning. The opening pattern of the winning hole 650a is referred to as the opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a prize.

FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an opening pattern that allows V winning (opening pattern set in the first round of jackpot A6) is set. . When the opening pattern that allows V winning is set, first, the right specific winning opening 650a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, at the time point when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right specific winning hole 650a is switched from the closed state to the open state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 80(a), it takes 0.3 seconds after the opening operation of the right specific winning hole 650a is started until the right specific winning hole 650a is in a completely opened state. For this reason, the state becomes completely released after 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. This completely open state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed (i.e., 2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right specific prize opening 650a is started. . This closing operation, like the opening operation, is completed in 0.3 seconds (it is completely closed after 2.3 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round). Then, when the right specific winning opening 650a is completely closed, the state in which the right specific winning opening 650a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (that is, when 2.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round), the right specific winning hole 650a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds, and closed for 0.3 seconds.

After that, there was a completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and an opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right specific winning hole 650a was completely opened for 0.3 seconds, and the opened state remained for 0.2 seconds). A series of operations (maintained and closed for 0.3 seconds) are repeated. Due to this repeated operation, in the opening pattern that allows V winning, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the final opening/closing operation is performed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the sixth embodiment, similar to the fifth embodiment, a detour accessory 700 is disposed in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to lengthen the falling time of the game ball. . When the game ball hit to the right passes the detour accessory 700, the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the right variable winning device 650 are equally arranged) ) is 7 to 8 seconds, similar to the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the player starts hitting right in the first round of jackpot, it takes at least 7 seconds from the start of the round for the game ball to reach the right variable winning device 650. Therefore, when hitting to the right, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 around the start of the last opening period in the opening pattern that allows V winnings (8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round). . Therefore, if you hit right in the first round, there is a possibility that you will be able to enter the game ball into the right specific winning hole 650a only in the last open period among the six open periods. be.

On the other hand, if you continue to hit left-handed in the first round of a jackpot, the lower area of the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650 are equally arranged), so if you immediately hit the ball to the left at the start of the first round, you can make the game ball reach the specific winning hole 650a from the first opening period. can. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to let the ball enter the right specific winning hole 650a. However, as mentioned above, the game ball rolling from the left side toward the right specific winning hole 650a has an open period of 1 (completely closed after opening starts) compared to the game ball rolling from the right side. 0.8 seconds), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right specific winning hole 650a is shortened. Furthermore, when the ball is hit to the left, more game balls cannot reach the right variable winning device 650 than when the ball is hit to the right. That is, the game ball may enter the out port 66 without reaching the curved member 810 by passing through the plurality of nails installed between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, or The ball may enter the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set, by hitting left in the first round, the number of game balls that will arrive while the right specific winning opening 650a is open is large, but the number of winning balls will be large. The game quality is such that the percentage of pitches is lowered and the number of wasted balls is increased. On the other hand, if you hit right in the first round of a jackpot, the number of game balls that will arrive while the right specific prize opening 650a is open is small, but the rate of balls entering will be high. becomes. Therefore, since the gameplay in the first round can be varied depending on the direction in which the game balls are launched, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the first round of jackpots. Furthermore, whether you hit right-handed or left-handed in the first round of a jackpot, the probability that the game ball will land in one round is approximately the same (for example, about 80%). As such, the opening period and board configuration are set.

FIG. 80(b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a prize (opening pattern set in the first round of jackpot B6) is set. be. When an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a prize is set, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after being completely opened. Ru. Therefore, whether you hit left-handed or right-handed, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the right specific winning opening 650a while the right specific winning opening 650a is open. The probability that a game ball will enter the ball during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when winning a jackpot, the player can be made to expect that the jackpot type will be jackpot A6 (an opening pattern that allows a V prize is set).

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door 650f1 during one opening period when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. As shown in FIG. 81, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the opening/closing door 650f1, so the game ball is not directed to the right specific winning opening 650a. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 81(a)). Then, when the opening timing of the opening/closing door 650f1 comes, the opening/closing door 650f1 slides to the left in a front view and is housed inside the curved member 810. When 0.1 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the part of the right specific prize opening 650a that is not blocked by the upper opening/closing door 650f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (Fig. 81 (see (b)). Thereby, the game ball rolling from the right direction can enter the right specific winning hole 650a. On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the left side is moved to the right side due to the upward slope in the upper right direction formed by the portion of the opening/closing door 650f1 that is not stored inside the curved surface member 810 and the convex portion 650g1. The ball is prevented from entering the specific winning hole 650a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right specific prize opening 650a, similar to the state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right specific prize opening 650a, and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter, continues for 0.1 seconds. However, when 0.1 seconds have passed (that is, 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the opening operation), most of the opening/closing door 650f1 is accommodated inside the curved surface 810 (the protrusion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b). The width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), so that the game ball that has reached the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 650g1 without passing through the top surface of the opening/closing door 650f1. (See FIG. 81(c)). Therefore, even a game ball that has rolled from the left side in front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right direction (game ball fired by hitting the right hand) and the game ball rolling from the left direction (game ball fired by hitting the left hand) enter the right specific winning slot 650a. The player is now ready to pitch the ball. After that, until the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, game balls rolling from both directions (both the right side and the left side) can enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

As shown in FIG. 81, when 0.3 seconds have elapsed since the opening operation was started, the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely housed inside the curved member 810, and only the convex portion 650g1 is exposed to the outside (opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 81(d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. This closing operation takes the same amount of time (ie, 0.3 seconds) as the opening operation and the opposite operation. For this reason, the period during which a game ball can enter the right variable winning device 650a after the opening operation is started until the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed again is limited to the period during which the game ball can enter the right variable winning device 650a. The period is 0.6 seconds from 0.1 seconds after the start until 0.1 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, when hitting left-handed, the period is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. That is, when the game ball is hit to the right, the percentage of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 entering the ball is higher than when the game ball is hit to the left.

In this way, in the present sixth embodiment, the period during which a game ball can reach the right specific winning hole 650a is determined by whether the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 from the right side or the game ball arrives from the left side. It is configured to vary depending on whether it is a game ball or not. Thereby, when a game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 from the right side, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect the ball to enter the right specific winning hole 650a. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, more game balls are sent to the right variable winning device 650 in the first round of the jackpot when the ball is hit left-handed than when the ball is hit right-handed. It is configured to reach the target. Therefore, if you hit left in the first round of a jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right specific winning hole 650a, but it is possible to realize a gaming experience where there are many chances for the ball to enter the right winning hole 650a. When a game ball is hit, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left specific winning hole 650a, but it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which there is little chance of the ball entering the ball. Therefore, the gameplay in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the direction in which the game balls are launched, so that the player's interest in the game in the first round can be improved.

In addition, in the present sixth embodiment, by providing the convex portion 650g1 on the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1, the period during which the game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right specific prize opening 650a can be changed by rolling from the right side. Although the period was set to be shorter than the period during which a moving game ball can enter, it is not necessarily necessary to provide the convex portion 650g1. Even if the convex portion 650g1 is removed, the opening/closing door 650f1 may roll from the left side during the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 (for example, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 81(b)) due to the upward slope toward the upper right formed by the opening/closing door 650f1. It is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the right specific winning hole 650a.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first round of jackpot A6 (jackpot in which an opening pattern that allows a V prize is set) in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, when the first round of jackpot A6 starts, the words "Mode to hit several hits with left hand" and " The words ``You've reached a lot of points, but it's hard to get into V!'' and an image imitating an arrow pointing left are displayed. According to these display contents, when hitting left, more game balls can reach the right variable winning device 650, but it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650a (V winning prize). It is possible to easily make the players understand that the game becomes more interesting (difficult to play).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR3, the words "Right hit one-hit kill mode", the words "The number of hits is small, but it is easy to enter V!", and a right-pointing arrow are imprinted. The image you created will be displayed. With these display contents, when you hit right, fewer game balls reach the right variable winning device 650, while the game ball becomes easier to enter the right specific winning opening 650a (it becomes easier to win V). It is possible to easily make the player understand that it becomes a gender.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, an image imitating the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 is displayed in the display area HR4 of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, on the front side of the variable prize winning device 650 when viewed from the front, a decoration resembling the alphabet “V” is displayed, and at the top left side when viewed from the front in the display area HR4, “Aim for V! A display area HR7 in which characters "!" is displayed is displayed. According to these display contents, by letting the game ball enter the right variable prize winning device 650, which is decorated in the shape of the letter "V", an advantageous result will be obtained for the player (after the jackpot ends) It is possible to easily make the player understand that the probability of the special symbol will change.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, for the display area HR4, the right variable winning device 650 is oriented to the left side and the upper right side when viewed from the front with respect to the image imitating the right variable winning device 650. An image of an arrow is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the image imitating the right variable prize winning device 650 has the words ``Win a few hits'' attached to it, and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side when viewed from the front is attached. The image is captioned with the words "one hit kill." According to these display contents, when the player hits the left ball according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (selects the mode to win several hits), the game ball hits the right variable prize winning device 650 from the left direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game is rolling. In addition, when the player hits the right ball according to the display contents of the display area HR3 (selects the one-hit kill mode), the game ball rolls toward the right variable winning device 650 from the upper right direction when viewed from the front. This can be easily made understood by the players. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand in which direction he or she should pay attention in order to confirm whether or not a game ball will enter the right specific winning hole 650a.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 9(a)). The difference is that a pattern table 202aa is added. Furthermore, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b have been changed. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines the opening pattern of the right specific winning hole 650a in the first round of the jackpot (either the opening pattern that allows a V winning or the opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V winning) for each jackpot type. . This opening pattern table 202aa defines data indicating the start timing of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 650f1. At the start of the first round of the jackpot, the opening pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is selected from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as the opening pattern for the first round. By predefining the opening pattern (start timing of opening/closing operation) in the opening pattern table 202aa, the opening/closing door 650f1 can be opened/closed with the same opening pattern every time the jackpot is won.

Next, details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 83(b). FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, “Jackpot A6” is selected. are defined in association (see 202b1 in FIG. 83). This "Jackpot A6" has 16 rounds, and in the first round of the jackpot, it is an open pattern that allows you to win a V prize (it is possible to enter the game ball into the right specific prize opening 650a at a rate of about 80%). This is the jackpot type for which the opening pattern) is set. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with "Jackpot A6" are 80 from "0 to 79". In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which "jackpot A6" is determined is 80% (80/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of “80 to 99”, “Jackpot B6'' are defined in association (see 202b2 in FIG. 83). This "Jackpot B6" has 16 rounds, and in the first round of the jackpot, there is an open pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize (an open pattern that makes it almost impossible to enter the game ball into the right specific winning hole 650a). This is the set jackpot type. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with "Jackpot B6" are 20 from "80 to 99". In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which "jackpot B6" is determined is 20% (20/100).

In the sixth embodiment, a jackpot type is provided in which an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize is provided, but it is not necessarily necessary to provide an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize. For example, instead of configuring an opening pattern in which a V-win is always possible when a jackpot occurs, by lowering the proportion of V-wins, the proportion of probability-variable states set after a jackpot is the same as in the sixth embodiment. You can adjust it so that With this configuration, the number of release patterns can be reduced, and the amount of data in the release pattern table 202aa can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment has a probability variable setting flag 203aa, a probability variable pass The difference is that a counter 203ab, a prize winning number counter 203ac, a remaining ball timer flag 203ad, a remaining ball timer 203ae, a probability variation effective flag 203ag, a probability variation effective timer 203ah, and a discharge number counter 203af are added. There is.

The variable probability setting flag 203aa is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to a variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined depending on whether or not a game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a during the jackpot game. Here, inside the right variable winning device 650, a probability changing switch 650e (not shown) is arranged at a position where the game ball that enters from the right specific winning opening 650a always passes. When the output of this probability change switch 650e is turned on, it is determined that a game ball has entered the right specific winning hole 650a, and the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to on (S1305 in FIG. 88, FIG. 89 (see S1410). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203aa is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 87). Note that this probability change setting flag 203aa is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

In addition, if the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 650e before the power is cut off, and it can be determined that it has passed. It may be configured such that the probability change setting flag 203aa is officially set to ON and the return is made only in that case. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch 650e has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203ab, which will be described later, has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, damage to the hole can be reduced by determining fraud, such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203aa to ON while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on.

The variable probability passing counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the variable probability switch 650e after the end of one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot). In addition, by the sum of this variable passing counter 203ab and the ejected number counter 203af described later, it can be determined whether all the game balls that entered the right specific winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in the first round have been ejected. . The variable probability passage counter 203ab is updated by adding one value each time the passage of the variable probability switch 650e is detected during a predetermined period after one round (so-called ball throwing period) (see FIG. 89). S1409). Further, after executing a process to determine whether the number of winning game balls and the number of ejected balls match the right specific winning hole 650a, it is reset to the initial value "0" (S1415 in FIG. 89). Note that this probability variable passage counter 203ab is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The number-of-winnings counter 203ac is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. . Specifically, when it is detected that a game ball has passed through a ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided on the variable winning device 65 or the above-mentioned probability change switch 650e provided on the right variable winning device 650. Based on this, the value is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303 in FIG. 88). On the other hand, when one round ends, the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 calculate the number of won prizes (total value of the winning number counter 203ac and the probability variable passing counter 203ab) and the number of dispensed prizes ( After it is determined whether the output number counter 203af matches the output number counter 203af, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 89). It should be noted that the value of this prize winning number counter 203ac is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203ad indicates that when a game ball remains inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the end of a round, the ball for ejecting the remaining game ball is This is a flag indicating whether or not it is the current period. When this remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to on, it means that it is a ball throw period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set on, the remaining ball timer 203ae, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (see S1405 in FIG. 89).

The remaining ball timer 203ae indicates that a game ball remains inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the time when one round ends and the specific winning hole 65a or the right specific winning hole 650a is closed. This is a counter for determining whether the time required for the remaining game balls to be ejected has elapsed. The time required for the game ball to be ejected is 0.5 seconds, and in the sixth embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203ae. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae (in this embodiment, 0.8 seconds), the number of prizes entered into the variable prize winning device 65 or the right variable prize winning device 650 matches the number of prizes discharged. A determination is made as to whether or not the current status is present (S1411 in FIG. 89). If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. In addition, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which game balls are left in the right variable winning device 650 and the game balls are flown down to the variable probability switch 65e at the timing of the first round of a jackpot.

In addition, if the number of winnings and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if the flag is on, even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 650e, the probability change setting flag 203aa is not activated. A configuration may also be configured in which it is not set to on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a probability variable state from being improperly assigned.

The ejected number counter 203af is a counter for counting the number of game balls ejected to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 in each round of the jackpot. This ejected number counter 203af is calculated when the game balls pass through the ball ejection port (provided in the ball ejection port) for ejecting the game balls from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or right variable winning device 650). Each time the ball ejection port switch is turned on due to the passage of a game ball, the value is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 89). After the device 650 determines whether the number of winning balls matches the number of balls ejected, it is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1414 in FIG. 89).

<About the control processing of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89. First, with reference to FIG. 85, jackpot control processing 7 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S921) is executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 29) in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30, S904) in the fifth embodiment (and first embodiment). This is the process to be performed.

Of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in this sixth embodiment, each process of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 is performed in the jackpot control process in the fifth embodiment (and first embodiment) (see FIG. 30). The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 of (see) are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1021), and the present process is ended. Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011 Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot is set is set. The jackpot end process is executed (S1022), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot ending process (S1022) will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific A winning process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the winning in the winning opening 650a (S1023). The details of this winning process (S1023) will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the winning process (S1023) is completed, abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the game balls that entered the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a are normally discharged (S1024), This process ends. Details of this abnormality processing (S1024) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1021) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1021). This jackpot operation setting process (S1021) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and jackpot type, as described above.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of jackpot (S1101: No). ), the specific winning hole 65a is set to be opened (S1102), and the process moves to S1105.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is jackpot A6, an open pattern (see FIG. 80(a)) that allows V winning is read out, while if the current jackpot type is jackpot B6, it is difficult to win V. The open pattern (see FIG. 80(b)) is read out.

When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the opening pattern read in the process of S1103 is then set (S1104), and the process moves to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), the opening and closing of the right specific winning opening 650a can be controlled in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1022) will be described with reference to FIG. 87. This jackpot end process (S1022) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. In this jackpot end processing (S1022), first, it is determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203aa is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203aa is off (S1201: No), the current This means that no game ball entered (won a prize) into the right specific prize opening 650a during the jackpot, so by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 100, the game state after the jackpot ends. is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1202), and the process moves to S1204.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203aa is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball entered the right specific winning hole 650a during this jackpot. By setting the variable probability flag 203e on, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a variable probability state for special symbols and a time saving state for normal symbols (S1203), and the process moves to S1204.

In the process of S1204 executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a status command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the status after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 (S1204), The probability change setting flag 203aa is set to OFF (S1205), and this processing is ended. By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 87), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability change setting flag 203aa.

Next, details of the winning process (S1023) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. As described above, this winning process (S1023) is a process for performing processing corresponding to winnings to the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a. In this winning process (S1023), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the opening state of the specific winning hole 65a or the right specific winning hole 650a until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round validity period (S1301: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S1301: Yes), then enter a prize into any of the specific winning holes (specific winning hole 65a or right specific winning hole 650a). It is determined whether it has been detected (S1302), and if it is determined that a winning in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process goes to S1306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning has been detected in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203ac is updated by adding 1 (S1303). ). Next, it is determined whether or not the current round is the first round (S1304), and if it is determined that it is the first round (S1304: Yes), the right special winning hole 650a is entered in the first round of the jackpot. Since this means that the ball has landed (a prize), the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305), and the process moves to S1306. On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S1304: No), the process of S1305 is skipped and the process moves to S1306.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether the value of the number of winnings counter 203ac has become a value of 10 or more (S1306), and if it is determined that the value of the number of winnings winnings counter 203ac has become a value of 10 or more (S1306: (Yes), the process moves to S1308, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter 203ac is less than 10 (S1306: No), then it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1307), and the round time is If the time has elapsed (S1307: Yes), the process moves to S1308, and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1307: No), there is no need to end the round, and the process ends immediately. In addition, in the process of S1307, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if it is the end timing of the set opening pattern, but if it is the second round or later, It is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1308, closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is set (S1308), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1309). Next, the remaining pitch timer flag 203ad is set to ON to set a pitch period (S1310), and the process ends.

Next, details of the abnormality processing (S1024) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. As described above, this abnormality processing (S1024) is a process for determining whether the game balls that entered the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a are normally discharged. In this abnormality processing (S1024), first, it is determined whether the current period is in the round validity period (S1401), and if it is not in the round validity period (S1401: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round validity period has expired (S1401: Yes), then check whether the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (the game ball has passed through the ejection port for ejecting the game ball from each variable winning device). (has been ejected) (S1402).

In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203af (S1403), and the process moves to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining pitch timer flag 203ad is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining pitch timer flag 203ad is off (S1404: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404: Yes), it means that the current time is in the ball disposal period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is set to 1. is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ball removal period (0.8 seconds elapsed from the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer 203ae is determined (S1406). If it is determined that the value of 203ae is not the upper limit value (it is not the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether the current time is the ball shooting period after the end of the first round. (S1407), if it is determined that it is the ball dispensing period after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 650e (S1408), and the probability change switch 650e is determined. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through 650e (S1408: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 650e (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203ab (S1409), and the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON. (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the current ball removal period is the ball removal period after the second round and subsequent rounds (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410 Skip the process and end this process.

In addition, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (it is the end timing of the ball dispensing period) (S1406: Yes), then the number of balls ejected (the number of balls ejected counter 203af is value) matches the number of prizes won (the total value of the value of the number of prizes won counter 203ac and the value of the probability variable passage counter 203ab) (S1411).

In the process of S1411, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of won pieces do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process moves to S1413. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, while the right specific prize opening 650a is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of passing a game ball to the probability change switch 650e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of winning pieces match (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is reset (S1414). Thereafter, the values of the prize winning number counter 203ac, the discharge number counter 203af, and the variable passing counter 203ab are reset (S1415), and this process is ended.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 89), each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a , and the occurrence of a malfunction in which game balls that have entered the right variable winning device 650a) are not ejected normally can be detected and notified at an early stage.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a privilege (prize ball) is given to the player when a game ball enters the jackpot game (during the special game state). Two types of winning devices are provided: a variable winning device 65 and a right variable winning device 650. The right specific winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can enter in the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, in addition to the prize ball, a special prize will be awarded after the jackpot ends. A variable state of the pattern is given. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot will be advantageous for the player changes. The game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball.

The right specific winning hole 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left-handed and when hitting right-handed, and if you continue hitting left-handed in the first round, the right specific winning hole 650a Although the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 increases while the ball 650a is in a state where the ball can enter, the proportion of the arriving game balls that enter the right specific winning hole 650a is configured to be low. . On the other hand, if you continue to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 will decrease while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a state where balls can enter, but the number of game balls that have reached the It is configured such that the percentage of balls entering the right specific winning hole 650a is high. That is, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 (the number of opportunities to win into the right specific winning hole 650a) during a predetermined period (period until the opening pattern of one round ends) ( element) is configured so that left-handed players are more advantageous than right-handed players. In addition, the aspect (factor) of ease of hitting the ball (hitting rate) with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is configured so that right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. With these, it is possible to vary the gameplay in the first round of the jackpot depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched. Instead, the player can select either a game feature in which the number of game balls that reach the target is increased, or a game feature in which the number of game balls that reach the target is small but the ball entry rate is high. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a gaming experience that suits the tastes of more players, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period (first round) of the jackpot, if you hit right-handed, you will have an advantage in terms of ball entry rate compared to if you hit left-handed (right-handed). The game balls that have reached the variable winning device 650a are more likely to enter the right specific winning hole 650a. The configuration is advantageous in that respect (more game balls can easily reach the right variable winning device 650a). This allows the player to decide whether to play right-handed or left-handed by making the advantages and disadvantages different for right-handed and left-handed batters. However, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed players is not limited to this. For example, if a game ball enters a position where it is easy to enter the game ball when hitting the ball left-handed (difficult to enter the ball when hitting the ball right-handed), it is detected that the game ball enters the position even though the opening time is short (for example, 1 second at most). We have set up a special prize opening where a large number of prize balls are awarded (for example, 15 balls per ball entered) when the game ball is hit to the right. It is also possible to provide a specific winning hole at a position where the opening time is long (for example, 5 seconds at most) but the number of prize balls awarded is small (for example, 3 balls per ball entered). Then, the specific winning openings to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely short (for example, to 0.1 seconds). With this configuration, if you continue to hit left-handed during a jackpot, the number of game balls that enter the specified winning hole will likely decrease, but the number of game balls that enter the specified winning hole will be awarded. It is possible to realize a gaming experience in which the number of prize balls increases. On the other hand, if you continue to hit right-handed during a jackpot, more game balls will easily enter the specified winning slot, but the number of prize balls awarded will decrease if the ball enters the specific winning slot. You can realize your sexuality. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select his/her favorite gameplay and play the game. For example, the variable winning device 65 may be provided at a position where it is easy for the game ball to enter the ball when the ball is hit to the left (it is difficult to enter the ball when the ball is hit to the right), and the game ball may enter the ball when the game ball is hit to the right. The right variable winning device 650 is provided in a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to hit the ball if the ball is hit to the left), and the variable winning device 65 is not opened during the period when the right variable winning device 650 is opened in the first jackpot. It may be configured so that the period is shorter than that of the previous period. In other words, if you continue to hit the ball to the right in the jackpot of 1, the probability that the ball will enter the right specific winning hole 650a and be given a variable probability state after hitting the jackpot increases, but the number of prize balls obtained will decrease, If you continue to hit to the left, many game balls will enter the special winning hole 65a, making it possible to win a large amount of prize balls, but it will become difficult to let the ball enter the right special winning hole 650a. A configuration may also be adopted in which the gaming state after a jackpot is disadvantageous. Even with this configuration, since the superiority can be made different for each firing direction during a jackpot, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In this case, the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device that awards only prize balls for balls that land), and the right variable winning device 650 (a variable winning device that awards balls for balls that land and also a variable prize device that awards balls for balls that land), The positional relationship with the variable winning device (which also provides a variable prize winning device) may be reversed. Furthermore, setting aspects (elements) that are more advantageous for right-handed players and aspects (elements) that are more advantageous for left-handed players is not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, during a normal game, a configuration may be provided in which elements are provided that make left-handed players more advantageous than right-handed players, and elements that make right-handed players more advantageous than left-handed players. More specifically, for example, the configuration includes a left ball entrance into which a game ball fired when hitting the left hand can enter, and a right ball entrance into which a game ball fired when hitting the right hand can enter, The configuration is such that a special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters any of the ball entrances. In the time-saving state of normal symbols, by playing the game with the right ball and aiming for the right ball opening, it is more advantageous in terms of gaming efficiency than hitting with the left hand. In this case, it is more disadvantageous than right-handed hitting, but if you win a jackpot, it is also possible to select a jackpot type that is more advantageous than right-handed hitting (a type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of an advantageous state). good.

In the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (first round), when the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball that reaches the right variable prize winning device 650a is specified to the right, compared to when the game ball is hit to the left. While the configuration makes it easier for balls to enter the winning hole 650a, when the game ball is hit to the left, it becomes easier for more game balls to reach the right variable prize winning device 650a compared to when the ball is hit to the right. It was configured as follows. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the firing direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which a corresponding effect is executed depending on the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when left-handed hitting is detected, the display mode for the first round (see FIG. 82) is such that the display area HR2 is lit and the display area HR3 is turned off. When a right-handed hit is detected, the display mode may be set so that the display area HR3 is lit and the display area HR2 is turned off. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the gameplay selected by the accident.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is configured to be opened by sliding in the left direction when viewed from the front, so that a game that has rolled from the right side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can be opened. Although the ball is configured so that the period during which the ball can be entered is longer than that of the game ball rolling from the left side, the shape and operation details of the opening/closing door 650f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing door 650f1 may be configured to open from the front side to the back side when viewed from the front. The length of the opening/closing door 650f1 on the right front side in front view may be configured to be shorter than the length on the left front side in front view by one game ball or more. That is, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is stored to the back side in front view, the right side of the opening/closing door 650f1 becomes ready for entry of game balls earlier than the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1, and when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. Alternatively, when the opening/closing door 650f1 faces forward and protrudes forward, the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1 may be configured so that game balls can be put in and delivered sooner. Even in the case of this configuration, similarly to the sixth embodiment described above, a game ball that rolls from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 enters the ball more than a game ball that rolls from the left side. It can be configured so that the period in which it is possible becomes longer.

In the sixth embodiment, due to the board configuration, left-handed hitting is physically more advantageous than right-handed hitting (that is, the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 enters the right specific winning opening 650a However, this configuration provides an aspect in which right-handed players are more advantageous than left-handed players (i.e., the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 650 during one round). It is not limited. For example, it may be realized in a controlled manner. More specifically, for example, the right specific winning hole 650a is provided at a position where the arrival rate of the game ball is the same whether the ball is hit right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player is hitting the right hand or the left hand, and it is detected that the player is hitting the right hand or the left hand. The opening pattern may be different depending on the case. That is, when a right-handed player is detected, the number of openings of the right specific winning hole 650a is small, but the right specific winning hole 650a is opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively long, while a left-handed player is detected. In this case, the right specific winning hole 650a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings of the right specific winning hole 650a is relatively large, but the opening period of each opening is relatively short. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the player selects the jackpot gameplay by operating an operating means such as a button instead of the direction in which the game ball is launched.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. In the fifth embodiment described above, all the game balls fired by right-handed players pass through the detour accessory 700. In other words, when a ball is hit to the right, it always takes 7 to 8 seconds to flow down to the lower region of the game board 13 (the region where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are provided). It was. That is, in a normal game state other than when a jackpot game is being executed, if the player hits right, the game efficiency deteriorates.

In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, two types of channels are provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and when flowing down one channel, the flow passes through the detour accessory 700 as in the fifth embodiment. While the game ball flows down to the variable prize winning device 65, when flowing down the other channel, the ball is prevented from entering the detour accessory 700, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. It is said that That is, a channel in which the period until the game ball enters any of the ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64, specific winning port 65, out port 66, general winning port 63, etc.) is relatively long; Two types of channels are provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80: a flow path that takes a relatively short period of time until the ball enters one of the entrance ports. As a result, the gameplay differs depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched during a jackpot (there is a possibility that some wasted balls may occur, but the gameplay is such that the jackpot can be quickly used up, and it is difficult for wasted balls to occur). This makes it possible to prevent deterioration in gaming efficiency when the game is played by hitting right.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the main controller 110 has a The configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. It is. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 90, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment, the game ball can flow down to the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and to the left side of the detour accessory 700 when viewed from the front. This differs from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment in that a flow path is provided. Another difference is that the electric accessory 64a that was provided in conjunction with the first ball entrance 64 has been removed. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the explanation, the flow path in which the detour accessory 700 is provided will be referred to as the right first flow path, and will be referred to as the right first flow path with respect to the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and with respect to the detour accessory 700. The flow path provided on the left side when viewed from the front is referred to as the second right flow path.

As shown in FIG. 90, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 through which game balls can pass is provided above the second flow path on the right. As a result, the normal symbol lottery is executed similarly to the fifth embodiment and the like. As shown in FIG. 90, the word "GO" is attached to this normal ball entry port 67. A second ball entry port 640 into which game balls can enter is provided below the normal ball entry port 67. When a game ball enters the second ball entry port 640, a special symbol lottery is executed in the same way as when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and a special symbol lottery is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. In the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), the percentage of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the state (low probability state of the special symbol or variable probability state of the special symbol). It is configured to be. On the other hand, the type of jackpot determined when a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol will be different depending on whether the jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol or the jackpot by drawing the second special symbol. (See FIG. 92(a)). More specifically, it is easier to determine the type of jackpot with a larger number of rounds when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery than when a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured. Thereby, a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery can bring greater joy to the player than a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

The second ball entry port 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened in the right direction when viewed from the front. While this electric accessory 640a is closed (stands vertically), the game ball that has flowed into the second right channel cannot enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, while the electric accessory 640a is open (tilted to the right when viewed from the front), most of the game balls that have flowed into the second right channel enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball becomes possible. This electric accessory 640a is variable to the open state under the same conditions as the electric accessory 64a of the fifth embodiment and the like. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, if the normal symbol is won in the lottery, the opening period of "0.2 seconds x 1 time" and the number of openings are set, while the normal symbol In the time-saving state, when a normal symbol is won in the lottery, an opening period of "1 second x 2 times" and the number of openings are set. In addition, similar to the fifth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds, while in the time short state of the regular symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. becomes very short. Therefore, when playing a game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the right second channel in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 (game balls are wasted). On the other hand, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, the game method of firing game balls aiming at the second flow path on the right allows for frequent consumption (the number of fired game balls and the second entering ball). The game balls can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 to the extent that the number of prize balls paid out by entering the ball into the opening 640 is approximately the same. Therefore, in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (the special symbol's variable probability state and the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), the right second By continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the flow path, if you get a jackpot, you will be able to draw the second special symbol that will easily determine the advantageous jackpot type (jackpot type with a relatively large number of rounds). It can be executed continuously without being reduced. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, most of the game balls will be wasted even if you aim at the second flow path on the right. It is necessary to play games. Even if a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol, an unfavorable jackpot type (a jackpot type with a relatively small number of rounds) is likely to be determined, and the more you continue to hit left-handed, the fewer balls you have. Therefore, the player can play the game with stronger expectations that the game state will be set in the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Further, an out port 66 is provided below the second ball entry port 640. When a game ball enters the out port 66, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without being awarded a prize ball. This out port 66 can prevent game balls from clogging in the second right channel. As shown in FIG. 90, the second flow path on the right contains the game ball until it enters either of the ball entry ports (the second ball entry port 640 or the out port 66). There is almost no structure that prevents the ball from flowing down (changes the direction of travel or slows down the ball). Therefore, compared to the first right channel, the period from the launch of the game ball to the ball entering any of the ball entrances is extremely short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, by shooting the game ball aiming at the right second channel, the game can be played efficiently.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the first right channel in which the bypass accessory 700 is provided, the normal ball entry port 67 and the second ball entry port are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A second right flow path in which 640 is provided is provided. The second ball entry opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball (the electric accessory 640a is easily released) during the game state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so in the normal state of the normal symbol, the ball is hit left-handed. , and in a high probability state of normal symbols, it is possible to make a right hit. That is, even in the presence of the detour accessory 700, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of switching the direction in which the game ball is fired according to the gaming state during normal gaming (gaming states other than jackpot gaming).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 91 shows the display mode in the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (the probability variable state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol). It is a figure showing an example. As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the upper side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front (the upper part of the display area where the variable display of the third symbol is being executed) ), a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR8 is formed. For this display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 91, the message ``Aim for ``Go'' by hitting right! ! '' and an image imitating a rightward arrow are displayed. Based on these display contents, the player is instructed to hit the game ball to the right with a firing strength (firing speed) that passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 marked with the word "GO". It can be easily understood that the game ball can also be entered into the second ball entry port 640.

In the seventh embodiment, by firing the game ball at a firing intensity of 85% to 100% (that is, by rotating the operation handle 51 to a position of 85% to 100% of the movable range), the right The game ball can flow into the first channel, and by firing the game ball with a firing intensity of 60% to 90% (that is, rotating the operating handle 51 to a position of 60% to 90% of the movable range) (by this), game balls can flow into the right second flow path. Here, if the game ball is fired within the range of firing intensity of 85% to 90%, it may flow into the first right flow path or the second right flow path depending on the direction of repulsion of the game ball, etc. There is sex. Furthermore, when a game ball is launched with a firing intensity of 60% to 65%, there is a possibility that the ball will flow into the second flow path on the right, and there is a possibility that it will flow into the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80. . On the other hand, if the game ball is fired within the range of firing intensity of 91% to 100%, the game ball will almost certainly flow into the first right channel. Furthermore, when the game ball is fired within the range of the firing intensity of 66% to 84%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the second right channel. Note that when the game balls are fired with a firing intensity of 25% to 59%, the game balls almost certainly flow into the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Furthermore, if the game ball is fired with a firing intensity of less than 25%, the game ball will not be fired into the game area because it will not be able to cross the return ball prevention member 68.

<Electrical configuration in seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9(a)), since the first per-type selection Only some of the specified contents of table 202b have been changed. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment determines whether the lottery when winning the jackpot is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Different jackpot types are defined depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots drawn by drawing the first special symbol, if the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the jackpot type is “Jackpot A7” is defined in association (see 202b1 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot A7" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state with special symbols and a time saving state with normal symbols. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with "Jackpot A7" are 5 from "0 to 4", so the first In the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the proportion (probability) of determining "jackpot A7" is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots drawn by drawing the first special symbol, when the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is "5 to 59", the jackpot type is "jackpot B7". ” are defined in association with each other (see 202b2 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state with special symbols and a time saving state with normal symbols. That is, although the number of rounds is smaller than "Jackpot A7", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous gaming state, so it is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous to the player. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with “Jackpot B7” are 55 from “5 to 59”, so the first In the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the ratio (probability) of determining "jackpot B7" is 55% (55/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots drawn by drawing the first special symbol, when the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C7". ” are defined in association with each other (see 202b3 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot C7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 8 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols. That is, "Jackpot C7" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type because the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the jackpot is also relatively unfavorable. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with "Jackpot C7" are 40 from "60 to 99", so the first In the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the ratio (probability) of determining "jackpot C7" is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots from the second special symbol lottery, when the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "Jackpot D7". ” are defined in association with each other (see 202b4 in FIG. 92(a)). This "Jackpot D7" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a variable probability state with special symbols and a time saving state with normal symbols. That is, similar to "Jackpot A7", this is the type of jackpot that is most advantageous to the player both in terms of the number of rounds and in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with "Jackpot D7" are 60 from "0 to 59", so the first In the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the ratio (probability) of determining "jackpot D7" is 60% (60/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots from the second special symbol lottery, when the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E7". ” are defined in association with each other (see 202b5 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot E7" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols. That is, although the number of rounds is the largest, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a relatively disadvantageous gaming state. Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with "Jackpot E7" are 40 from "60 to 99", so the first In the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the ratio (probability) of determining "jackpot E7" is 40% (40/100).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, if there is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, 95% of the time the jackpot will be won in 8 rounds (a relatively small number of rounds) (jackpot B7 and jackpot C7). ) is determined, and a jackpot (jackpot A7) of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) is determined only at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot (either jackpot D7 or jackpot E7) is determined for 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) at a 100% rate. There is. As a result, it is easier to determine a larger number of rounds if a jackpot is won by the second special symbol lottery than by a jackpot by the first special symbol lottery. In this case, it is possible to create a greater sense of expectation in the player.

Note that the method of making the jackpot by drawing the second special symbol more advantageous than the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the rate at which the type of jackpot in which the special symbol changes probability after the end of the jackpot is determined may be configured to be higher for jackpots based on the lottery of the second special symbol. good. Further, for example, it may be configured such that as the number of time reductions when a normal jackpot occurs, the number of time reductions where the second special symbol is a jackpot is more likely to be selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 92(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8) in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Instead, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided, and instead of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided. The difference is that a number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 each have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). There is. That is, it has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Each value is stored respectively. When a special symbol lottery is held, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted to the execution area (see FIG. 11). Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if each counter value is not stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first pending area of are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11). Based on this, judgments such as the lottery of special symbols are performed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 The number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) for the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) based on (starting winning) is set to 4. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. It is added by 1 (see S424 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 93). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. It is added by 1 (see S430 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S223 in FIG. 93).

<About the control process of the main controller in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. First, special symbol variation processing 8 (S121) in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 93. This special symbol variation process 8 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the fifth embodiment (and first embodiment). Similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), this is a process for setting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. be.

Of the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, the special symbol variation processing in the fifth embodiment (first embodiment) (see FIG. The same processes as those in S201, S202, and S208 to S217 (see 22) are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the second special symbol reserved ball number The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value larger than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol reserved Subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the ball number counter 203c2 and update it (S223), and set the special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S224) . The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process moves to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S222: No) Next, acquire the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (S226), and determine whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value greater than 0. (S227).

In the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S227: No), the Since there is neither a reserved ball of the first special symbol nor a reserved ball of the second special symbol, which means that the variable display of special symbols cannot be started anew, this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special Subtract 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 and update it (S228), and set the special figure 1 reserved ball number command that indicates the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 ( S229). The number of reserved pitches command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, similar to the special chart 1 reserved pitch number command, and is used in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 29). In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is executed. The process moves to S208.

Next, details of the starting winning process 8 (S122) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. This starting winning process 8 (S122) is a process that is executed in place of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the fifth embodiment (and first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). This is a process for executing the corresponding control when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is detected.

In this starting prize winning process 8 (S122), first, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first ball entrance 64 (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) The number of times the variable display is held (N1) is obtained (S422). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that no prize has been entered into the first ball entrance 64 (S421: No), or even if the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the process of S423 is performed. In the case where it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S423: No), the process moves to S427. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special chart 1 reserved pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) to be described later. is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203c1 from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved pitch number command through the process of S425, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop number that were updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above are set. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the process is performed in S427. transition to. In addition, in the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second ball entrance 640 (S427). In this process as well, similarly to the process in S421, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. In the process of S427, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2) The number of pending balls N2 of the corresponding variable display is obtained (S428), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S429).

Then, whether there is no winning to the second ball entry port 640 (S427: No) or even if there is a winning to the second ball entry port 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is If it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S429: No), the process moves to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value as the special symbol in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved pitch number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S431, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop number that were updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above are set. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. Transition. In addition, in the process of S432, similarly to the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a pre-read process is executed to pre-read the win/fail from various counter values acquired based on the starting winnings (S433), and this process ends. Details of this prefetch processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 95.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this pre-reading process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 was detected in the current starting winning process 8 (see FIG. 94). (S1501), and if it is determined that no new ball has been detected (S1501: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that a new entering ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), next, check whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected entering ball is the upper limit (i.e., 4). If it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), the various counter values acquired at the time of detecting the ball entering (starting winning process 8 (Fig. 94) Based on the various counter values stored in the process of S426 or S432), the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a jackpot or not), its stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type), and its The fluctuation pattern is predicted (S1503).

After the process of S1503 predicts the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type), and the fluctuation pattern, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and the process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these pieces of information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the period until the passing game ball enters any of the ball entrances (the area below the game board 13) is displayed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first flow path on the right takes a relatively long time (requires 7 to 8 seconds), and the time it takes for the game ball to enter any of the ball entrances is relatively short. The configuration is such that two flow paths are provided, including the second flow path on the right (for about 1 second). By firing the game ball aiming at the right first flow path in a jackpot, the period until it reaches the specific winning hole 65a becomes longer (that is, until the jackpot ends), similarly to the fifth embodiment described above. (the period of time becomes longer), but the game ball can enter (win) into the specific winning hole 65a at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by left-handed hitting.

In addition, when a game ball is fired toward the second flow path on the right, there is almost no possibility that the ball will enter the specific prize opening 65a, but the ball will be fired into the second ball entrance 640 for a relatively short period of time (1 second). degree). Therefore, in the high probability state of normal symbols in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be opened, the game ball continues to be fired toward the second right channel (66% to 84%). By hitting the ball to the right with the firing strength), it is possible to continuously draw the second special symbol without reducing the number of balls held. On the other hand, if you hit left-handed, there is almost no possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entry port 640, but the ball will be able to enter the first ball entry port 64 and will also enter the specific winning port 65a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. In addition, the lower area of the game board 13 (the first ball entry port 64 and the specific winning port 65) is opened in a shorter period (about 1 to 2 seconds) than when the game ball is fired toward the first right channel. The game ball can be made to reach the provided area). Therefore, a player who wants to complete the jackpot in a short period of time (want to win many prize balls in a short period of time) can be forced to hit left-handed. Further, even in a normal state with a normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to release, a game can be played with the aim of the game ball entering the first ball entry port 64 by hitting to the left. In this manner, in the seventh embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows can be varied depending on the gaming state, the player's preference, etc. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of hitting the game ball in different directions, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path is configured to enter either the second ball entry port 640 or the out port 66, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, a part of the game balls flowing into the second right channel may be configured to be able to reach the first ball entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65, etc. Moreover, conversely, it may be configured such that a part of the game balls that have flowed into the first right channel can reach the second ball entry port 640.

In the seventh embodiment, there is a right first channel where it is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640, and a second ball entry opening where it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Although the configuration is such that the right second flow path that allows the ball to easily enter the ball 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path can enter the first ball entry port 64, and the winning rate to the specific winning hole 65a is lower than when it flows down the right first flow path. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64 regardless of whether the game is played by hitting left-handed or if the game is played by hitting right-handed aiming at the second flow path on the right. Since the ball can enter the ball, the game ball can be launched in the player's preferred firing direction during a normal game. Also, for example, on the left side of the game board 13, there is a left first channel where it is easier for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball is difficult to enter the first ball entry opening 64, and a specific winning channel that is easier to enter than the first left channel. A second left channel may be provided, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the opening 65a and allows the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 more easily than the first left channel.

In the seventh embodiment, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, an effect (see FIG. 91) that suggests firing a game ball aiming at the normal ball entrance 67 is executed. However, in addition to this, if the player is hitting left-handed even though the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (for example, it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entry hole 64) In this case), it may be configured to perform a performance (warning performance) that more strongly requests the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the normal ball entrance 67. Similarly, when it is detected that the player is hitting the right ball in the normal state of the normal symbol (for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67), the player is also prompted to hit the left ball. It may also be configured to perform a strongly requested presentation (warning presentation). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to play the game with the game ball launched in the wrong direction, resulting in a loss.

<First modification of seventh embodiment>
Next, various modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. First, with reference to FIG. 96, a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, but the period until it reaches the specific winning hole 65a is longer. there was. In addition, when the game ball flows down the right second channel, the game ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entry port 640, but difficult to enter the specific winning port 65a.

On the other hand, in the first modification, both the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path are configured to be able to reach the specific winning a prize opening 65a. In addition, as will be described in detail later, by continuously hitting the right hand during the execution of a jackpot game, the game ball flowing down the first right channel and the game ball flowing down the second right channel It is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. As a result, during the execution of the jackpot game, two game balls are won (balls entered) into the specific winning hole 65a, so in each round, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning hole 65a exceeds the maximum number of times. It becomes easy to win a prize. To be more specific, as described above, in each round of the jackpot, when the 10th winning prize is detected for the specific winning opening 65a, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. . Under this situation, if two game balls arrive at the specific winning hole 65a at almost the same time when nine game balls have already entered the specific winning hole 65a, the specific winning hole will be activated after the 10th winning is detected. Until the opening 65a is closed, the 11th game ball that arrived at almost the same time as the 10th game ball can also be won into the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in one round, it is possible to obtain prize balls for 11 winnings (prize balls for winning more than the specified number of times) relatively easily. Therefore, it is possible to obtain prize balls exceeding the original jackpot specifications of the pachinko machine 10, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 13 in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 96, in the game board 13 according to the first modification, the first right channel (the channel formed on the rightmost side of the game board 13) has the detour accessory in the seventh embodiment. Instead of 700, a plurality of nails are provided. The plurality of nails allow the downward direction of the game ball to be switched multiple times. On the other hand, the second right channel (the channel formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the first right channel) has a channel that prevents the game ball from flowing down compared to the first right channel. There are fewer structures (to slow things down). Therefore, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path than when it flows down the right first flow path, the lower area of the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64 and the variable The period until the player reaches the area where the winning device 65 is arranged becomes shorter. More specifically, the period from when the game ball is launched to when it reaches the variable prize winning device 65 is 0.0 when the game ball flows down the second flow path than when it flows down the first flow path. It will be about 6 seconds shorter.

Moreover, above the right first flow path and the right second flow path, a distribution member 850 is provided that distributes the game balls to either the right first flow path or the right second flow path. A game ball fired by hitting the ball to the right always reaches this distribution member 850, and is distributed by the distribution member 850 to either the first channel on the right or the second channel on the right. It will be done. As shown in FIG. 96, this distribution member 850 has two holding parts 850a and 850b that can receive and temporarily hold the game balls flowing down. Basically, the distribution member 850 is in a stationary state with one of the holding parts 850a and 850b facing upward, and a game ball fired by right-handed hitting is received by the holding part facing upward. FIG. 96 exemplifies a situation in which a game ball fired by a right-hand hit is caught in a state where the holding portion 850a is stationary with the holding portion 850a facing upward.

When a game ball is received by either of the holding parts 850a, 850b, gravity due to the weight of the game ball acts on the distribution member 850. As a result, when the game ball is received by the holding part 850a, the distribution member 850 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation axis 850c, and the holding part 850b becomes in a state facing upward. In this state, the holding part 850a forms an inclination downward to the lower left, so the game ball held by the holding part 850a falls to the lower left when viewed from the front. That is, it flows down the right second flow path. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the holding part 850b, the distribution member 850 rotates clockwise about the rotation axis 850c, and the holding part 850a faces upward. In this state, the holding part 850b forms an inclination downward to the lower right, so the game ball held by the holding part 850b falls to the lower right in front view. That is, it flows down the right first flow path. Therefore, each time the distribution member 850 distributes game balls to one of the channels, a different holding portion is in a state facing upward. Therefore, each time the game balls reach the distribution member 650, the game balls can be distributed alternately to the first right flow path and the second right flow path.

As described above, the period until it reaches the variable prize winning device 65 is approximately 0.6 seconds shorter when flowing down the second right flow path than when flowing down the first right flow path. As described above, the firing interval of game balls is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, when you hit the ball to the right continuously, one game ball that was distributed to the first right flow path and a game ball that was fired after the first game ball and were distributed to the second right flow path. , reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously, and enter the specific winning hole 65a almost simultaneously. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, when nine game balls have already entered the special winning hole 65a (the special winning hole 65a will be closed if one more winning is detected), the right first stream will be closed. If the two game balls flowing down the channel and the second right channel reach the specific winning hole 65a almost simultaneously, 11 game balls can be entered in one round. In other words, by simply continuing to hit the ball to the right, you can easily enter the special winning slot 65a in excess of 10 balls, which is the maximum number of winnings in each round of the jackpot (the number of winnings that is the condition for ending the round). It is possible to make the ball hit (so-called over winning occurs). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, in this first modification, the game ball was configured to be alternately distributed to the first right flow path and the second right flow path by the distribution member 850 just by continuing to hit the game ball to the right. It is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which the distribution member 850 is deleted and the player himself/herself adjusts the firing intensity to aim for over-winning. In this case, when the number of winnings for the specific winning opening 65 in each round reaches 9 (the number of winnings that is 1 less than the specified number), first, the game ball is fired aiming at the first flow path on the right, and then By firing the game ball aiming at the second right flow path, the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path are made to reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously. be able to. In other words, the 11th game ball can be won in the specific winning hole 65a after the winning of the 10th game ball is detected until the specific winning hole 65a is closed. Therefore, compared to the first modification described above, a technique for quickly switching the firing direction is required, but for a player who accurately switches the firing direction, over-winning can occur more reliably. That is, in the first modified example described above, the over winning does not occur unless the 10th game ball is distributed to the first right channel in one round. In other words, depending on the state of the distribution member 850 at the start of the round, whether or not it is easy to win an excessive amount of money varies. On the other hand, if the distribution member 850 is removed, a player who has the skill to switch the firing direction will be sure to send the 10th and 11th game balls to the right first channel and the right second channel. Since it can be made to flow down into the flow path, it is possible to more reliably generate over winnings.

<Second modification of seventh embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, but the period until it reaches the specific winning hole 65a is longer. there was. In addition, when the game ball flows down the right second channel, the game ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entry port 640, but difficult to enter the specific winning port 65a.

On the other hand, in the second modification, a variable winning device 6500 is used instead of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment as a variable winning device that awards prize balls when a game ball enters during a jackpot. is arranged at a position where a game ball fired by left-handed hitting cannot enter the ball. This variable prize winning device 6500 is configured so that a game ball flowing down the right first flow path and a game ball flowing down the right second flow path can enter the ball. The first right flow path is configured to take a longer time to reach the variable winning device 6500 than the second right flow path, and while the variable winning device 6500 is open. , is configured so that the percentage of balls entering the specific winning hole 6500a is high. Thereby, in a jackpot, it is possible to realize different gaming properties depending on whether the game ball is fired aiming at the first right flow path or when the game ball is fired aiming at the right second flow path. In other words, by continuing to fire the game ball aiming at the first right flow path, the execution period of the jackpot game becomes longer, but while it becomes a game with less wasted balls, if you continue to fire the game ball aiming at the right second flow path. By continuing to fire game balls, the execution period of the jackpot game is shortened, but the game is such that wasted balls may occur.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 97, in this second modification, the variable winning device 65 is removed from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 90), and the lower part of the right second flow path However, the only difference is that it is connected to the area below the game board 13, and that a variable prize winning device 6500 is provided between the first right flow path and the second right flow path.

As shown in FIG. 97, the variable winning device 6500 awards a prize ball each time a game ball enters a specific winning hole 6500a into which the ball can enter. This variable prize winning device 6500 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 6500a1 and 6500a2 that can prevent the game balls from entering. These electric accessories 6500a1 and 6500a2 are normally closed so that it is impossible to enter the special winning hole 6500a, and in each round of the jackpot, the electric accessories 6500a1 and 6500a2 are closed for a predetermined period of time (until 30 seconds elapse, or the game ball is (until 10 balls enter).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 97, by opening the electric accessory 6500a1 provided on the right first flow path side, the lower end of the first guiding flow path (guiding flow path 780) inside the detour accessory 700 and the tip of the electric accessory 6500a1 are close to each other. That is, as a result of it becoming impossible for the game ball to pass between the guide channel 780 and the electric accessory 6500a1, the game ball flowing down the guide channel 780 almost certainly wins a prize in the specific winning hole 6500a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 6500a2 provided on the second right flow path side is opened, a gap of one game ball or more is left on the left side of the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path is guided by the open electric accessory 6500a2 and becomes easier to enter the specific winning hole 6500a, but it is easier to enter the specific winning hole 6500a than the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a2. There is also a possibility that the ball may pass through the left side and flow down to the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entry port 64 and the ball out port 66 are provided).

As described above, in the second modification of the seventh embodiment, when the game ball is launched toward the second right flow path, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the specific winning hole 6500a. If you continue to fire the game ball toward the first right flow path during the jackpot, it will take a long time for the game ball to reach the variable winning device 6500 (the execution period of the jackpot game is long), but It is a game feature in which almost all the game balls that arrive while the specific winning hole 6500a is open can be made to enter the specific winning hole 6500a. On the other hand, if you continue to shoot the game ball toward the second right channel during a jackpot, the period until the game ball reaches the variable prize winning device 6500 is short (the jackpot game cannot be finished in a short period of time). However, there is a risk that some (for example, 1 out of 10 balls) game balls will enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning hole 6500a. . Therefore, similarly to the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls (game balls that enter the out hole 66 without entering the specific winning hole 6500a) at the cost of lengthening the jackpot period. The player can be allowed to choose between a game feature in which the player can enjoy a big win quickly, and a game feature in which a relatively large number of wasted balls are produced in exchange for a speedy jackpot.

<Third modification of seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment described above, the detour accessory 700 provided in the first right flow path lengthens the period during which the vehicle passes through the first right flow path. As a result, when the game ball flows down the right first channel, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, while the period until it reaches the specific winning hole 65a is lengthened.

On the other hand, in the third modification, the detour accessory 700 is deleted in the first right flow path, and the width of the flow path is less than two game balls (in other words, the detour accessory 700 is not provided). (The width of the flow path was narrower than that in the case where the In order to prolong the period during which the game balls flow down the right first flow path, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are arranged in the right first flow path. By narrowing the width of the first right channel, the ratio of the area of the first right channel to the area of the board surface of the game board 13 can be reduced, which increases the degree of freedom in the placement of nails, windmills, etc. on the board surface. can be increased.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 98, in the game board 13 according to the third modification, the detour accessory 700 is placed in the first right flow path with respect to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 90). The difference is that a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided instead, and that the width of the first right flow path is narrower and the width of the second right flow path is wider.

The above-mentioned rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be explained in more detail. As shown in FIG. 98, three rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided in the first right flow path. The operations of these three rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be explained using the rotating body 861 as an example. As shown in FIG. 98, the rotating body 861 has a substantially crescent-shaped shape with a part of the circle hollowed out, and can rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the rotation axis 861b as the rotation axis. configured to be possible. Further, the rotating body 861 is provided with a ball stopping portion 861a that can catch only one game ball flowing down. In a state where the ball stopper 861a faces the upstream direction of the first right flow path, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 861 is received by the ball stopper 861a. Since the ball stopper part 861a rotates in conjunction with the rotational movement of the rotating body 861, the game ball received by the ball stopper part 861a also rotates about the rotation axis 861b. When the ball stopping portion 861a faces the downstream side of the first right channel, the game ball falls to the downstream side of the first right channel due to the gravity acting on the game ball.

On the other hand, if the game ball reaches the rotating body 861 with the ball stopper 861a not facing the upstream direction in the first right flow path, if the ball contacts the upstream side of the outer circumference of the rotating body 861. state. This state in which the game ball is in contact with the outer circumferential portion continues until the ball stopping portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the first right channel due to the rotation of the rotating body 861. When the ball stopper part 861a faces the upstream direction of the first right flow path, the game ball flows down to the ball stopper part 861a, and from then on, as described above, the rotation axis moves in conjunction with the rotational movement of the rotating body 861. After performing a rotation operation using 861b as the rotation axis, it falls to the downstream side in the first right flow path.

In this way, by providing the rotating bodies 861 to 863 for the right first flow path, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down each time it reaches each rotating body. The game ball performs multiple actions such as once stopping the game ball that has reached each rotating body, having the ball stopper receive the game ball, and causing the ball to rotate around the rotation axis in conjunction with the rotational movement of the rotating body. can be made to do so. Therefore, compared to the case where the rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided, the period required for the game ball that has reached the first right channel to flow down the first right channel can be prolonged. Therefore, compared to a game ball fired by left-handed hitting, the period until the game ball fired toward the right first flow path reaches the lower region of the game board 13 can be prolonged.

As described above, in the third modification of the seventh embodiment, instead of the detour accessory 700, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863, which require a relatively small installation area, are arranged in the first right flow path. There is. By reducing the speed of the game balls flowing down (preventing them from flowing down) by each of the rotating bodies 861 to 863, the game balls launched toward the first right channel reach the lower region of the game board 13. The period between is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball launched by left-handed hitting reaches the lower area. With these, it is possible to reduce the area occupied by the first right channel while realizing the same gameplay as in the seventh embodiment described above, so that the degree of freedom in the board configuration can be further improved.

Note that in the third modification of the seventh embodiment, three rotating bodies were provided for the first right flow path, but the number and arrangement of the rotating bodies were the same as in the third modification. It is not limited and can be determined arbitrarily.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is possible.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and their modifications, the flow path with the detour accessory 700 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, but the panel configuration can be changed arbitrarily. can do. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be arranged on the left side of the variable display unit 890.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and their modifications, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 of the detour accessory 700 was configured to protrude toward the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 13; It is not limited to this. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be provided deeper than the base plate 60. That is, by arranging the detour accessory 700 on the back side of the base plate 60, and by configuring the front side of the detour accessory 700 of the base plate 60 with at least a transparent material, it is possible to visually see the falling situation of the game ball. do. Of the base plate 60, the upstream side of the detour accessory 700 (the position where the game ball that has advanced to the back side of the base plate 60 can flow into the opening 710), and the downstream side (the position where the game ball flows out from the opening 720) An opening large enough to penetrate the base plate 60 and allow the game balls to pass through may be provided at a position where the played game balls can flow out to the front side of the base plate 60. With this configuration, nails, windmills, etc. can be arranged on the base plate 60 in front of the detour accessory 700. That is, the board surface of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

In each of the embodiments described above, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the validity and the pre-reading result of the variation pattern (variation type), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to these, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not continuous preview performance can be executed based on the type of jackpot. With this configuration, the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot can be predicted based on whether or not the continuous preview performance is executed and the performance type of the preview performance, so that the player's interest in the continuous preview performance can be improved. Can be done.

In each of the embodiments described above, the continuous preview performance is more likely to be executed as the lottery results have higher expectations, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lower the expectation level of the lottery result, the more likely it is that the continuous preview performance will be executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the player plays the game in the expectation that the continuous preview performance will not be executed. Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, when it is decided to execute a continuous preview performance, the variable display accompanied by the preview performance is executed continuously over a plurality of variable displays; There is no need to execute the preview performance over the variable display. For example, at the start of each variable display for which a continuous preview effect is set, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to set a continuous preview effect. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the higher the expectation level of the winning information that triggered the setting of the continuous preview performance, the higher the lottery probability for setting the preview performance in each variable display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the anticipation of a jackpot as the preview performance continues, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In each of the embodiments described above, when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, instead of determining one or more pieces of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a one by one, the logical sum data (first implementation It is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on data indicating the content of the pending lottery results, such as form), points (second embodiment), and the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment). However, it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which one or more pieces of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined one by one. In addition, in each of the above embodiments, only when the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, the logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment), and the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment) The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on data indicating the content of the pending lottery results, such as format), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the continuous preview performance that is normally executed. Part or all of the determination may be based on data indicating the contents of the pending lottery results. Conversely, in a state other than the state where the preview lottery is prohibited (normal state), the configuration always determines whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based only on the lottery results notified by the winning information command (random number range command). You can also use it as

In each of the above embodiments, the preview lottery prohibited state is set when the execution of the continuous preview performance is decided, but the setting timing of the preview lottery prohibited state is not limited to this, and can be set at any time. may be determined. Specifically, for example, the preview lottery prohibition state may be set only when it is decided to execute a continuous preview performance that will ultimately lead to a jackpot. That is, the continuous preview performance may be configured to be able to be overwritten while the continuous preview performance is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of continuous preview effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibited state may be set based on the start of a jackpot, or the advance notice lottery prohibited state may be set based on the start of the probability change state of a special symbol or the time saving state of a normal symbol. Good too. Further, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the preview lottery prohibition state by lottery every time the fluctuation start timing is reached, or for example, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the It may be configured to switch between setting and canceling the preview lottery prohibited state depending on the operation content. Similarly, the timing at which the preview lottery prohibition state is canceled is not limited to the timing at which one normal variable display ends after the continuous preview performance ends, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, it may be configured such that the preview lottery prohibited state is not canceled until the end of the five variable displays after the continuous preview performance ends, or conversely, the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled when the continuous preview performance ends. You may. Alternatively, it may be canceled at a predetermined timing during the execution of the continuous preview performance, or it may be canceled regardless of the continuous preview performance. For example, it may be configured to be canceled based on the end of a jackpot, variable probability state, time saving state, etc., or while the preview lottery prohibited state is set, it may be canceled by lottery every time a variable display is executed. It may be configured to determine. Furthermore, it may be configured to be cancelable based on the player's operation. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide a state in which advance lottery is prohibited.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed based on the start winning command (random number range command) output from the main control device 110. However, the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the main control device 110 side determines whether or not to execute the continuous preview performance, and notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the determination result. In this case, information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is set as a continuous preview effect may be included in the variable pattern command and transmitted, or may be transmitted as a separate command. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only the fact that execution of the continuous notice performance has been decided is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the period during which the continuous notice performance continues is grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. .

In each of the embodiments described above, the preview lottery prohibited state is set only from the time when it is decided to execute the continuous preview performance until the end of one fluctuating display after the end of the continuous preview performance. , but not limited to this. For example, even in the case of a jackpot, a preview lottery prohibition state may be set. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the preview lottery prohibited state is canceled, and the data (logical sum data (first embodiment)) indicating the lottery results (variation type) of each reserved ball held at that time, points (second Embodiment) or the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment)) may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed. During the jackpot, the player shoots the ball at the specific winning opening 65a, so the first ball opening 64 (see FIG. 2), which is provided vertically above the specific winning opening 65a, also hits the jackpot. There is a high possibility that multiple balls will enter the ball. That is, there is a high possibility that the number of reserved balls will increase from the start to the end of the jackpot. Under this situation, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed every time a starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 that occurs during a jackpot is detected, starting winnings corresponding to the variation type with low expectations are first determined. After the continuous preview presentation is determined based on the above and the preview lottery prohibited state is set, there is a possibility that a starting prize corresponding to the highly anticipated variation type will occur. In other words, even though there is a ball on hold that corresponds to a variation type with a high expectation level, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance based on the variation display based on the variation type with a high expectation level. There is a risk that it will disappear. On the other hand, during a jackpot, a state in which the advance notice lottery is prohibited is set, and at the end of the jackpot, the state in which the advance notice lottery is prohibited is canceled, and a continuous advance notice production is performed based on the lottery results of each reserved ball held at that time. If the configuration is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance based on the suspended ball of the variation type with the highest expectation level among the suspended balls that are held at the end of the jackpot. can. Therefore, continuous preview effects can be set more appropriately.

In each of the above embodiments, an example has been described in which, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance depending on the variation type of a plurality of reserved balls. It is not limited to the determination of For example, the technology of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the mode of pending symbols to a different mode from normal (a so-called gaming machine equipped with a pending notice effect). . That is, a prohibited state in which changing the aspect of the pending symbol is prohibited is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when it is decided to execute a pending notice performance or when a jackpot is started), When the prohibited state is lifted, the variation types of the multiple suspended balls that are on hold at the time of the cancellation are determined, and the lottery probability according to the variation type with the highest expectation level is used to decide whether or not the suspension notice can be executed; It may also be configured to determine the mode of pending symbols when executing a pending notice. Furthermore, the techniques of each of the embodiments described above are not limited to the case where the type of fluctuation of a reserved ball is determined in order to execute a continuous preview performance, a suspended preview performance, or the like. The techniques of each of the embodiments described above can be applied when performing some kind of determination on a plurality of reserved balls.

In each of the above embodiments, when the preview lottery prohibition state is lifted, the determination as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be performed is performed according to the variation types of a plurality of reserved balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, without setting the preview lottery prohibition state, each time a starting prize is detected, it is determined whether or not the continuous preview performance can be executed according to the variation type of each suspended ball held at that time (while the continuous preview performance is being executed) If so, a configuration may be adopted in which a determination is made as to whether or not the continuous preview performance can be extended. With this configuration, there is no need to change the control depending on whether or not the preview lottery is prohibited, so the description content of the control program can be simplified. Therefore, the development load on the developer can be reduced.

The embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. More specifically, for example, the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the range of values to which various counter values (random values) in the second embodiment belong, and the audio lamp controller 113 side: A series of controls that perform prefetch processing based on the range of values to which various counter values (random values) belong may be applied to the first embodiment and the third embodiment.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (When the read-ahead prohibition state is canceled, all pending items are read in advance)
In a gaming machine comprising a main control means that executes main control regarding a game, and a sub-control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means satisfies one of the discriminating conditions. a discriminating means for performing a discriminating based on the establishment of the determination, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means, and the discriminating means a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the sub-control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, the slave control means comprises a signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the discrimination result signal outputted by the first outputting means and the discrimination information signal outputted by the second outputting means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the reception of the result signal, and the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. Based on this, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored at least up to a predetermined number of information until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. means, specific discrimination means capable of executing a specific discrimination based on information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means, triggered by the establishment of a specific condition, and discrimination by the specific discrimination means. a second performance execution means that executes a second performance over an execution period of one or more of the first performances executed after the determination, based on the second determination result. A gaming machine A1 comprising:

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines are known that are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing an advantageous jackpot game to the player. In addition, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes in addition to the symbols, and attempts to improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of interesting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are capable of executing the same series of effects over the execution period of multiple variable displays (executing the so-called continuous preview effect). There are also games that can keep the player's sense of expectation continuously throughout the variable display that is executed.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous notice performance, the execution determination of the continuous notice performance may be won again, and the continuous notice performance may be executed redundantly. In this case, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous preview performance should have expectations.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the main control means uses the bonus game execution means to prompt the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means is outputted to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is first transmitted before the discrimination condition is satisfied. The signal is outputted to the slave control means by the second output means. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal reception means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance execution means executes a first performance according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, at least a corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, with the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal being an upper limit of a predetermined number of information. The information is stored by the information storage means until the When the specific condition is established, a specific discrimination is performed by the specific discrimination means based on information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means, and the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the specific discrimination means. Based on this, the second performance is executed by the second performance execution means over the execution period of one or more first performances that are executed after the determination.

Thereby, the second performance can be executed over the execution period of one or more first performances, so it is possible to diversify the performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, upon reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, a reception time is determined whether or not to execute the second performance based on information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. A gaming machine A2 characterized by comprising a determining means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, in response to the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the second performance is performed based on information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. Since it is determined by the reception determining means whether or not to execute the second effect, it is possible to increase the chances that the second effect is executed, thereby making it possible to further diversify the effects.

In the gaming machine A2, the second performance execution means executes the first performance corresponding to the discrimination information signal that triggered the determination, when the reception determining means determines to execute the second performance. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the second performance is executed over an execution period of a plurality of the first performances including at least the following.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, when the reception determining means determines that the second performance should be executed, the first performance corresponding to the discrimination information signal that triggered the determination is performed. Since the second performance is executed by the second performance execution means over the execution period of at least a plurality of first performances, there is an effect that the performances can be diversified.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a restriction state setting means sets a determination restriction state in which determination by the reception determining means is restricted based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the restriction state setting means sets the determination restriction state. is set, a canceling means for canceling the discrimination restriction state based on the establishment of a predetermined cancellation condition, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the predetermined cancellation condition. A game machine A4 characterized by being a game machine.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, a discrimination restriction state in which the determination by the reception determining means is restricted is set by the restriction state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. When the discrimination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, the discrimination restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means based on the establishment of a predetermined cancellation condition. The specific condition is met when a predetermined release condition is met.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, discrimination by the specific discrimination means can be performed based on information corresponding to a plurality of discrimination result signals already stored in the information storage means, so that the second performance can be performed. This has the advantage that it is possible to determine whether execution is possible or not based on information corresponding to more determination result signals.

In gaming machine A4, gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the restriction state setting means sets the determined restriction state based on the reception determining means determining that the second effect is to be executed. .

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the discrimination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means based on the fact that the reception determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the execution of the second performance from being judged redundantly by the reception time discriminating means during the execution of the second performance.

In the gaming machine A5, the predetermined release condition is established based on at least one of the first effects being executed after the second effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied based on the fact that at least one first performance is executed after the second performance ends, so that the second performance is If at least one first performance is being performed during the execution of the second performance and after the second performance has ended, it is possible to restrict the determination as to whether to perform the second performance. Therefore, since the first performance without the second performance can be executed at least once after the second performance ends and before the second performance starts, the second performance can be performed at any time. It is possible to easily make the player understand whether the game has continued up to the first performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an easier-to-understand presentation.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the specific discrimination means includes information corresponding to the first discrimination result in the information according to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that when the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included, the ratio of the second determination result is higher than when the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, information corresponding to the first discrimination result is included in the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means. Since the discrimination by the specific discrimination means is performed so that when the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is included, the proportion of the second discrimination result is higher than when the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is not included. When the second performance is executed, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the bonus game will be executed.

<Characteristics Group B> (Distinguishes the type of fluctuation that is being held from the logical sum data of each holding area)
In a gaming machine comprising a main control means that executes main control regarding a game, and a sub-control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means satisfies one of the discriminating conditions. a discriminating means for performing a discriminating based on the establishment of the determination, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means, and the discriminating means a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the sub-control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, the slave control means comprises a signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the discrimination result signal outputted by the first outputting means and the discrimination information signal outputted by the second outputting means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the reception of the result signal, and the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. Based on this, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored at least up to a predetermined number of information until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. and calculation data calculation means for calculating predetermined calculation data by performing a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means, triggered by the establishment of a specific condition. and a second performance execution determining means for determining whether or not to perform a second performance based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means; and a second performance execution means for executing the second performance over an execution period of one or more of the first performances to be executed after the determination, based on the determination that the performance is to be executed. A gaming machine B1 is characterized by the following.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing an advantageous jackpot game to the player. In addition, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes in addition to the symbols, and attempts to improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of interesting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing the same series of effects over the execution period of multiple variable displays (executing so-called continuous preview effects). There are also games that can keep the player's expectations continuously high throughout the variable display that is executed.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous notice performance, the execution determination of the continuous notice performance may be won again, and the continuous notice performance may be executed redundantly. In this case, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous preview performance should have expectations. In addition, in order to solve this problem, it is possible to limit the determination of whether or not to execute a continuous notice performance until the first continuous notice performance is decided until the continuous notice performance ends. In this case, it is not possible to execute a continuous preview performance for the reserved ball based on the starting winning that is detected during the execution of a continuous preview performance, so the next continuous preview performance is executed after the first continuous preview performance ends. There were cases where there was a relatively long period of time between the two. Furthermore, it is possible to consider a method in which it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance after the end of the continuous notice performance based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls that were held during the continuous notice performance. Since it is necessary to determine the lottery results for reserved balls, there is a problem in that the processing load increases compared to the determination of whether or not continuous notice performance can be executed normally.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit. . A discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means is outputted to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is transmitted to the second output means so that the discrimination condition is satisfied. The signal is output to the slave control means before. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal reception means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance execution means executes a first performance according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, at least a corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal reception means, with the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal being an upper limit of a predetermined number of information. The information is stored by the information storage means until it is reached. When the specific condition is met, the calculation data calculation means performs a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means to calculate predetermined calculation data. Based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, the second performance execution determination means determines whether or not to perform the second performance. Based on the determination by the second performance execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance execution means A second performance is executed.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the second performance based on predetermined calculation data obtained as a result of performing predetermined calculations on information corresponding to a plurality of discrimination information signals. The processing load on the slave control means is reduced compared to the case where all the information stored in the controller is discriminated one by one and a decision is made as to whether to execute the second effect based on each discrimination result. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine B1, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, a predetermined identification is determined in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals that are the targets of the predetermined calculation. information discriminating means for discriminating whether information corresponding to the particular discriminating information is included; A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, when the determination is made, it is determined whether or not to execute the second performance based on the predetermined calculation data.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, information corresponding to predetermined specific discrimination information is included in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals that are the targets of the predetermined calculation. The information determining means determines whether or not the information is included. When the information discriminating means determines that information corresponding to specific discriminating information is included, the second performance execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance based on predetermined calculation data.

Thereby, the opportunity for the second performance execution determining means to perform the determination can be limited to the case where information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, so the frequency of the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

In gaming machine B2, the predetermined types of specific discrimination information include first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and second discrimination information corresponding to a discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. At least discrimination information is provided, and the second performance execution discrimination means determines that the first discrimination information is included rather than the information discrimination means determining that the second discrimination information is included. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it is determined that the second performance is executed at a higher rate when it is determined that the game is included.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the types of predetermined specific discrimination information, at least first discrimination information corresponding to a first discrimination result and second discrimination information corresponding to a discrimination result different from the first discrimination result are provided. ing. When the information discriminating means determines that the first discriminating information is included than when the information discriminating means determines that the second discriminating information is included, the second performance execution discriminating means selects the second It is determined when the performance is executed.

This has the effect of making the player expect that when the second effect is executed, the first determination result will be obtained and the bonus game will be executed.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, the main control means specifies the determination result by the determination means before the determination condition is satisfied, based on the determination information being acquired by the determination information acquisition means. and a discrimination information signal generating means for generating the discrimination information signal including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result specified by the preliminary specification means, and the information storage means is configured to generate the discrimination information signal in advance. The slave control means is configured to have at least the predetermined number of information storage areas each including a plurality of bits corresponding to each of the plurality of determination results that can be specified by the specifying means, and the slave control means is configured to have a storage area made up of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of determination results that can be specified by the specifying means. bit setting for setting a bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to a specific state in one storage area provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the discrimination information signal; and the calculation data calculation means calculates, as the predetermined calculation, a logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means as the predetermined calculation data. , the information determining means determines that information corresponding to specific discrimination information is included when a specific bit of the logical sum is in the specific state. Game machine B4.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, based on the fact that the discrimination information has been acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, the determination result by the discrimination means is specified by the pre-identification means before the determination condition is satisfied. A discrimination information signal containing at least information corresponding to the discrimination result specified by the preliminary specification means is generated by the discrimination information signal generation means. The information storage means includes at least a predetermined number of storage areas each including a plurality of bits corresponding to each of the plurality of determination results that can be specified by the advance specification means. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal in one storage area provided in the information storage means is set as a bit. A specific state is set by means. As the predetermined calculation, the logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means is calculated as predetermined calculation data by the calculation data calculation means. When the specific bit of the logical sum is in a specific state, the information determining means determines that information corresponding to the specific determination information is included.

As a result, by simply determining the state of a specific bit of the logical sum, it is possible to obtain a result equivalent to determining all the information used in the logical sum operation, reducing the processing load on the slave control means. It has the effect of being able to reduce

In the gaming machine B4, the bit setting means sets the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to the on state, and sets the other bits to the off state. .

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set to the on state by the bit setting means, while the other bits are set to the off state. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination by the second performance execution determination means can be accurately performed.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the type of the specific discrimination information is set to a plurality of types having different priorities to be determined by the second performance execution discrimination means, and the information discrimination means is for determining a bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority among the bits in the specific state, and the second performance execution determining means is configured to determine the bit determined by the determining means. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the second performance based on a determination ratio corresponding to the determination ratio.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of types having different priorities to be determined by the second performance execution determining means are set as the types of the specific determination result. Among the bits in a specific state, the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority is determined by the information determining means. The second performance execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance based on the determination ratio corresponding to the bit determined by the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to vary the ratio at which it is determined that the second performance is executed according to the determination result by the determination means specified by the advance identification means, so that the determination result by the second performance determination means can be used to determine when the second performance is executed. This has the effect of allowing the player to guess based on the presence or absence.

In gaming machine B6, when determining the specific bit, the information determining means determines whether the particular state is in the order of the priority starting from the bit corresponding to the determination result having the highest priority. The slave control means is characterized in that the slave control means includes discrimination aborting means for discontinuing the discrimination by the information discriminating means based on the fact that the information discriminating means determines that the specific state is present. Game machine B7.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific bit is determined by the information determining means, it is determined whether the bit is in a specific state in descending order of priority starting from the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority. In the slave control means, the discrimination by the information discrimination means is terminated by the discrimination abort means based on the fact that the information discrimination means discriminates that the specific state is present.

This makes it possible to abort the discrimination process without discriminating all the bits constituting a particular bit, which has the effect of reducing the processing load on the slave control means.

<Feature C group> (Specific information indicating pending content is updated in the sub, and it is determined whether continuous notice can be executed based on the specific information)
In a gaming machine comprising a main control means that executes main control regarding a game, and a sub-control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means satisfies one of the discriminating conditions. a discriminating means for performing a discriminating based on the establishment of the determination, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means, and the discriminating means a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the sub-control means; a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, the slave control means comprises a signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the discrimination result signal outputted by the first outputting means and the discrimination information signal outputted by the second outputting means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination result signal based on receiving the result signal; a specific information storage means storing specific information; and a signal receiving means. a discrimination result specifying means for specifying a discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal based on the reception of the discrimination information signal; and a discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means. information updating means capable of updating the specific information; second effect execution determining means determining whether to execute a second effect based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means; Based on the determination by the performance execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance is executed over the execution period of one or more of the first performances to be executed after the determination. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it comprises a second performance execution means.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing an advantageous jackpot game to the player. In addition, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes in addition to the symbols, and attempts to improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of interesting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing the same series of effects over the execution period of multiple variable displays (executing so-called continuous preview effects). There are also games that can keep the player's sense of expectation continuously throughout the variable display that is executed.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous notice performance, the execution determination of the continuous notice performance may be won again, and the continuous notice performance may be executed redundantly. In this case, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous preview performance should have expectations.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit. . A discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means is outputted to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is transmitted to the second output means so that the discrimination condition is satisfied. The signal is output to the slave control means before. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal reception means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance execution means executes a first performance according to the determination result indicated by the determination result signal. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means. Based on this, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated by the information updating means. Based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the second performance execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance, and the second performance execution determining means determines that the second performance is to be executed. Based on this, the second performance is executed by the second performance execution means over the execution period of one or more first performances that are executed after the determination.

Thereby, the second performance can be executed over the execution period of one or more first performances, so it is possible to diversify the performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, in response to the determination result being specified by the determination result specifying means, reception determining means determines whether or not to execute the second performance based on the specified determination result; A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is provided with a switching means for switching between having the second performance execution determining means or the reception determining means determine whether to execute the second performance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result is specified by the determination result specifying means, the reception determining means determines whether or not to perform the second performance based on the specified determination result. The switching means switches between having the second performance executing means or the reception determining means determine whether to execute the second performance.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in determining whether to execute the second performance.

In the gaming machine C2, a restriction state setting means sets a determination restriction state in which determination by the reception determination means is restricted based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; and the restriction state setting means sets the determination restriction state. a canceling means for canceling the discrimination restriction state based on the establishment of a predetermined cancellation condition, and the switching means cancels the second effect based on the establishment of the predetermined cancellation condition. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the second performance execution determining means switches to determine whether or not to perform the above.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the restriction state setting means sets a determination restriction state in which the determination by the reception determination means is restricted based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the restriction state setting means sets the determination restriction state, The discrimination restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means based on the establishment of a predetermined cancellation condition. Based on the establishment of a predetermined cancellation condition, the switching means switches so that the second performance execution determining means determines whether to perform the second performance.

Thereby, when the discrimination restriction state is canceled, the second effect execution determination means can determine whether to execute the second effect based on the specific information updated during the discrimination restriction state. There is an effect that the second performance execution determining means can perform the determination by taking into consideration the determination result corresponding to the determination information signal received during the determination restriction state.

In the gaming machine C3, the switching means determines whether to perform the second performance based on the fact that the second performance execution determination means determines whether to perform the second performance. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the switching is performed by a determining means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, it is determined whether to perform the second performance based on the fact that the second performance execution determining means has determined whether to perform the second performance. Since the switching means is used to perform the switching by the reception determining means, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably determine whether or not to execute the second effect.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specific information is updated by the information updating means after the discrimination restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means until the discrimination restriction state is next set by the restriction state setting means. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is equipped with an update avoidance means for avoiding update avoidance.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, information is updated from when the discrimination restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means until the discrimination restriction state is next set by the restriction state setting means. Since the update avoidance means prevents the specific information from being updated by the means, it is suppressed from updating the specific information in vain during a period in which it is difficult for the second effect execution means to perform a determination using the specific information. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the slave control means includes regulation information storage means that stores regulation information defined by associating numerical data with each of the discrimination results that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means. The information updating means updates the specific information by performing a predetermined calculation using the numerical data defined in the regulation information in association with the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means. A game machine C6 is characterized in that it updates the game machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, for each determination result that can be specified by the determination result specifying means, prescription information defined by associating numerical data is stored in the prescription information storage means. Using the numerical data defined in association with the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, the information updating means performs a predetermined calculation to update the specific information.

As a result, specific information can be updated through a simple process of reading numerical data specified for each discrimination result and performing predetermined calculations, which has the effect of reducing the processing load when updating specific information. There is.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific information storage means stores, as the specific information, information indicating one determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, and the slave control means , the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly specified by the discrimination result specifying means is based on the priority determined in advance for each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means, The information updating means includes priority determining means for determining whether the priority level corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the information storage means is higher than the priority level, and the information updating means determines whether the priority level is higher than the priority level corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the information storage means; If it is determined that the priority corresponding to the determination result specified by is higher, the specific information is updated to information indicating the newly identified determination result. A gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, as specific information, information indicating one discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means is stored in the specific information storage means. In the slave control means, based on the priority determined in advance for each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means, the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly specified by the discrimination result specifying means is determined in the specific information storage. The priority determining means determines whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the means. When the priority determining means determines that the priority corresponding to the newly identified determination result is higher, the information updating means updates the specific information to information indicating the newly identified determination result. Ru.

As a result, even if the discrimination information signal is output multiple times, the specific information storage means stores only one discrimination result with the highest priority among the plurality of discrimination results notified by the plurality of discrimination information signals. Since only the information indicating the result can be stored, it is possible to decide whether to perform the second effect based on the discrimination information having the highest priority.

In the gaming machine C7, the slave control means, based on the specific information being updated by the information updating means, controls the process until the determination by the determining means that results in the newly specified determination result is executed. a number specifying means for specifying the number of times the first performance is performed during the time; and a performance number information storage means for storing performance number information corresponding to the number of times the first performance is specified by the number specifying means. and the second performance execution means executes the second performance for a period of execution of the first performance the number of times indicated by the performance number information stored in the performance number information storage means. A gaming machine C8 featuring:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, based on the specific information being updated by the information updating means, the first effect is executed until the determination by the determination means that results in the newly specified determination result is performed. The number of times is specified by the number of times specifying means. Performance number information corresponding to the number of times of the first performance specified by the number specifying means is stored by the performance number information storage means. The second performance is executed by the second performance execution means over the execution period of the first performance for the number of times indicated by the performance number information stored in the performance number information storage means.

Thereby, when the second performance execution determining means determines that the second performance is to be executed, the execution period of the first performance of the number of times indicated by the performance number information stored in the performance number information storage means is changed to the second performance. Since the second effect can be executed by simple control of setting it as an execution period, there is an effect that the processing load when executing the second effect can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C8, the slave control means changes the performance number information stored in the performance number information storage means to a number one less, based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. A gaming machine C9 comprising a performance number information updating means for updating the performance number information to the corresponding performance number information.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the sub-control means receives the performance number information stored in the performance number information storage means based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. Since the performance number information updating means updates the performance number information corresponding to the number of times less by one, the second performance is more reliably continued until the execution period of the first performance corresponding to the discrimination information with the highest priority. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics Group D> (Sends the range of random numbers obtained at the time of starting winnings to the sub as winning information)
In a gaming machine comprising a main control means that executes main control related to the game, and a slave control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means a judgment value generating means capable of updating and generating a judgment value; a judgment value obtaining means acquiring the judgment value generated by the judgment value generating means based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition; a determination means for determining whether the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means matches a predetermined specific value, and a method corresponding to the specific value when the determination means determines that the determination value matches the specific value; Based on the fact that the judgment value has been acquired by the control processing execution means that executes the process set by the control process execution means and the judgment value acquisition means, the currently acquired a small range specifying means for specifying which of the small ranges the judged value belongs to; and outputting a small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means to the slave control means. signal output means, and the slave control means receives the small range signal outputted by the signal output means, and the signal receiving means receives the small range signal by the signal receiving means. , a determination result specifying means for specifying a determination result by the determination means based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, a judgment value generated within a predetermined range by the judgment value generation means is acquired by the judgment value acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The determination means determines whether the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means matches a predetermined specific value. When the determining means determines that the value matches the specific value, the control processing execution means executes the process set corresponding to the specific value. Based on the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means, the small range identification process determines which small range the currently acquired judgment value belongs to among the plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of small ranges. Identified by means. A small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means is outputted to the slave control means by the signal output means. Further, in the slave control means, the small range signal outputted by the signal output means is received by the signal receiving means, and, triggered by the reception of the small range signal by the signal receiving means, the small range signal indicated by the small range signal is Based on this, the determination result by the determination means is specified by the determination result specifying means.

This has the effect that the slave control means can suitably discriminate the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

In the gaming machine D1, the slave control means includes regulation information storage means storing regulation information defining a correspondence relationship between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result by the discrimination unit. The discrimination result specifying means specifies the discrimination result by the discrimination means based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the regulation information stored in the regulation information storage means. A gaming machine D2 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, regulation information that defines the correspondence between the type of small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result by the discrimination unit is stored in the regulation information storage unit. Based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the regulation information stored in the regulation information storage means, the discrimination result specifying means specifies the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

This has the effect that the determination result can be easily specified based on the correspondence defined in the regulation information.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific value has a plurality of types including at least one or more values set as a first specific value and one or more values set as a second specific value. The control processing execution means executes the first processing when the judgment value matches the first specific value, and the control processing execution means executes the first processing when the judgment value matches the second specific value. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when the above-mentioned action occurs, a second process different from the first process is executed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific value has a plurality of types including at least one or more values set as the first specific value and one or more values set as the second specific value. When the judgment value matches the first specific value, the first process is executed by the control processing execution means, while when the judgment value matches the second specific value, the control processing execution unit executes the first process. Accordingly, a second process different from the first process is executed.

This has the effect that various processes can be executed depending on the type of specific value with which the determination value matches.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, among the small ranges, the small range in which the specific value is included is composed only of specific values of the same type.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, since the small range that includes the specific value is composed only of specific values of the same type, the small range that includes specific values of different types is It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a range or a small range in which a specific value and a value different from the specific value coexist. Therefore, since there can be a one-to-one correspondence between the small range and the discrimination result by the discrimination means, there is an effect that the discrimination by the discrimination result specifying means can be performed under conditions closer to the discrimination by the discrimination means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the main control means stores the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means at least until a judgment condition for executing the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied. A gaming machine D5 comprising a storage means, wherein the signal output means is capable of outputting the small range signal to the slave control means before the determination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means is stored at least by the determination value storage means until the determination condition for executing the determination by the determination means is satisfied. Before the determination condition is satisfied, the signal output means outputs the small range signal to the slave control means.

This has the effect that, in the slave control means, the determination result by the determination means can be specified before the determination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine D5, the main control means includes a discrimination result signal output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the slave control means includes a discrimination result signal output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the slave control means controls the discrimination result signal to be received by the signal receiving means. a first effect executing means for executing a first effect indicating the discrimination result notified by the received discrimination result signal based on the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means; , a second performance execution determination means for determining whether to perform a second performance, and a determination result that is a target of the determination based on the fact that the second performance execution determination means determines that the second performance is to be performed. A gaming machine D6 comprising: second performance execution means for executing the second performance over an execution period of a plurality of the first performances including at least a first performance showing the first performance.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is outputted by the discrimination result signal output means. Further, in the slave control means, based on the determination result signal being received by the signal receiving means, a first performance indicating the determination result notified by the received determination result signal is executed by the first performance execution means. be done. Based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, the second performance execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance. Based on the determination that the second performance is to be performed by the second performance execution determination means, the first performance is executed over the execution period of a plurality of first performances including at least the first performance that indicates the determination result that is the subject of the determination. A second performance is executed by the second performance execution means.

This has the effect of making it possible to diversify presentation modes.

In the gaming machine D6, the slave control means sets a discrimination restriction state in which the determination by the second performance execution determination means is restricted based on the fact that the second performance execution determination means determines that the second performance is to be executed. and a canceling means for canceling the discrimination restriction state based on the execution of at least one first performance after the execution of the second performance is completed. A gaming machine D7 featuring:

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, based on the fact that the second performance execution determination means determines that the second performance is to be executed, the determination restriction state in which the determination by the second performance execution determination means is restricted is set by the determination restriction state setting means. Set. After the execution of the second performance is finished, the discrimination restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means based on at least one first performance being executed.

As a result, during the execution of the second performance and after the second performance ends, if at least one first performance is being executed, it is possible to prevent the second performance from being newly executed. Therefore, at least one first performance that does not involve the second performance can be executed from the end of the second performance until the start of the next second performance. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand the timing at which the second performance has ended, so there is an effect that it is possible to realize a performance that is easier to understand.

In the gaming machine D7, the slave control means includes a determination result information storage means capable of storing determination result information indicating the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and the canceling means. a cancellation determination means for determining whether to execute the second performance based on the plurality of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means when the determination restriction state is canceled; Based on the fact that the second performance is determined to be executed by the cancellation determination means, the second performance is executed over the execution period of one or more of the first performances that are executed after the determination. A gaming machine D8 comprising: a time execution means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, the determination result information indicating the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means is stored by the determination result information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. When the discrimination restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means, it is determined whether to execute the second performance by the cancellation determination means based on a plurality of pieces of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means. Based on the determination that the second performance is to be performed by the release time determination means, the release time execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of one or more first performances that are executed after the determination. executed.

Thereby, when the discrimination restriction state is released, execution of the second performance can be set without waiting until a new small range signal is output from the main control means. Furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the second performance by taking into account the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means based on the small range signal output during the determination restriction state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more suitably determine whether to execute the second effect.

<Characteristic Group E> (The time it takes for a right-handed ball to reach the attacker is longer than when it is left-handed.)
A first flow path through which game balls fired in a first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, and the first flow path. a ball entry means provided at a position where at least the game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined ball entry means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege, wherein the second channel is configured to fire the game ball in the second direction for a period before the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball hitting means. A game machine E1 characterized in that the game machine E1 is configured such that the period until the played game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery conducted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening is a winning result, the winning opening enters a winning state in which the winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such conventional gaming machines, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded each time a game ball enters the grand prize slot during a winning state, so that the player enjoys playing the winning state as one of the pleasures. can be set.

However, in such conventional game machines, in order to make the game ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to fire the game ball in a fixed direction for each game machine, making the game monotonous during the winning state. There was a problem that it became .

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, game balls fired in a first direction flow down the first flow path, and game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction flow down the second flow path. Flow down. A ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game balls flowing down the first channel and the game balls flowing down the second channel can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. The second direction is set so that the period until the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. A flow path is configured.

As a result, for players who want the game ball to reach the ball entry means as quickly as possible, it is possible to have the game ball aim at the first flow path, while at the same time it takes a relatively long time to reach the ball entry means. A player who wants to have a game ball reach the ball entering means can be made to shoot the game ball aiming at the second channel. Therefore, since it is possible for each player to play the game by selecting his or her preferred firing direction, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine E1, the ball entry means is located at a position where the rate at which game balls that have flown down the second flow path enter is higher than the rate at which game balls that have flown down the first flow path enter the ball. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is located at.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the rate at which game balls that flow down the second channel enter the ball is higher than the rate at which game balls that flow down the first channel enter the ball. Since the ball entering means is arranged at a higher position, when the ball flows down the first flow path, the period until the ball reaches the ball entering means is shortened, but on the other hand, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering means. On the other hand, if the ball flows down the second channel, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means, but it takes a longer time to reach the ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the firing direction that suits each player's preference.

A gaming machine E3, which is the gaming machine E1 or E2, further comprising a decelerating means for decelerating the speed of the game ball flowing down the second channel.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1 or E2, the speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game ball launched in the second direction is prevented from entering. There is an effect that the period until the ball reaches the ball means can be more reliably made longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball entry means is variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first position. a variable means; a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and a discriminating means that causes the variable means to change the position from the second position a predetermined number of times to the A gaming machine E4 comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game variable to a first position.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment means.

This has the effect that the game can be played in the expectation that the determination by the determining means will yield a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine E4, the firing means is capable of firing game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or more than a specific firing interval, and during execution of the variable game, the variable means a first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position; a control means; during execution of the variable game, the variable means is set to the first position based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position; a second variable control means for changing the position between two positions, and during the specific period, after the game ball starts firing in the second direction, the game ball is fired in the second direction at the specific firing interval. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the period is at least longer than the period until the specific number of game balls finish flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game balls in the first direction and the second direction at firing intervals that are equal to or greater than a specific firing interval. During execution of the variable game, the variable means changes the first position based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entering means after the variable means has been changed from the second position to the first position. 1 variable control means to the second position. During execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position. be done. At least a specific period of time longer than the period from when the game balls start firing in the second direction until the specific number of game balls fired in the second direction at specific firing intervals finish flowing down the second channel. is constructed so that it is longer.

As a result, when a game ball is launched in the second direction during execution of a variable game, it is possible to cause a specific number of game balls to enter the ball entering means before the specific period elapses, so the game This has the effect of preventing people from incurring losses.

In the gaming machine E4, the variable game execution means is configured to perform a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position, triggered by the establishment of a specific condition during the execution of the variable game. A specific variable pattern that includes the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation that is varied to the second position after the elapse of time, and the variable means is controlled to vary, and one or more in the specific variable pattern The execution period of the first variable operation is such that the game ball launched in the first direction becomes reachable after the specific variable pattern is started, and the first variable operation is performed after the specific variable pattern is started. A game machine E6 characterized in that game balls shot in two directions are difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first position is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position when a specific condition was satisfied during execution of the variable game. The variable means is controlled to vary by the variable game execution means in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of variable operations. The execution period of the one or more first variable operations in the specific variable pattern is such that the game ball launched in the first direction can reach it after the specific variable pattern is started, and the specific variable pattern is started. It becomes difficult for game balls fired in the second direction to reach the target.

As a result, when the game ball is fired in the second direction, there is less chance of the game ball entering the ball entry means than when it is fired in the first direction, so the player who wants to fire the ball in the first direction It has the effect of making you think.

In the gaming machine E6, a first gaming state is set as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means in the variable game of 1, A game characterized by comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entering means in the variable game. Machine E7.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E6, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed is that a game is performed when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means in the first variable game. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, when a game ball enters the ball entering means in the first variable game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the game can be played while the variable game is being executed, paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means.

In the game machine E6 or E7, the first flow path allows the game balls that have flowed down to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and the second flow path allows the game balls that have flowed down to reach the ball landing means in the third direction. The ball entry means is made to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the second position, and the variable means is configured such that the game ball can flow down the upper surface thereof while being varied to the second position; The ball is arranged to be inclined so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is arranged in a state where the variable means is varied to the first position. In a state where the game ball can enter from above and the variable means is variable to the second position, the upper part is blocked by the variable means, and the variable means is A gaming machine E8, characterized in that the gaming machine E8 is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding from the fourth direction toward the third direction.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game balls flowing down the first channel reach the ball entering means from the third direction, while the game balls flowing down the second channel reach the ball entering means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. and reach it. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface thereof, and the variable means is inclined so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. It is arranged as follows. The ball entry means is configured such that the game ball can enter from above in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position. Further, in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the upper part of the ball entering means is closed by the variable means. By sliding from the fourth direction toward the third direction, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position.

This makes it difficult for game balls arriving from the third direction to enter the ball entering means while the variable means is changing to the first position, while game balls arriving from the fourth direction enter the ball entering means. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, during execution of a variable game, firing a game ball in the second direction is less likely to cause the game ball to reach the ball entering means and enter the ball entering means than firing the game ball in the first direction. It has the effect of increasing the height.

<Characteristics Group F> (If you hit right-handed during a jackpot, you will be more advantageous than left-handed in some respects, but you will be disadvantaged in other respects than left-handed.)
a firing means capable of firing at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a determining means for performing determination based on establishment of a determining condition; and identification by determination by the determining means. a bonus game executing means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, and a first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game, which is included in the execution period of the bonus game. a first element advantageous means that makes it more advantageous for a player to continue firing game balls in the first direction than to continue firing game balls in the second direction during a specific period; A second element, which is different from the element, is such that it is more advantageous for the player if the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction than the game ball continues to be launched in the first direction during the specific period. A gaming machine F1 comprising: two-element advantageous means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery conducted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening is a winning result, the winning opening enters a winning state in which the winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such conventional gaming machines, by placing a game ball into the grand prize opening during a winning state, a predetermined benefit such as a prize ball that is advantageous to the player is given, so that the player can win. It is possible to make the state one of the pleasures of playing games.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to win the game ball into the grand prize opening, it is necessary to fire the game ball in a predetermined direction for each game machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will become like simply continuing to shoot game balls in a predetermined direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem in that it becomes difficult to increase the player's interest in playing the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the firing means is configured to be able to fire at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. Discrimination is executed by a discriminating means based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by a privilege game executing means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. The first factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be launched in the first direction rather than the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. It is considered more advantageous by the first element advantageous means. The second factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction rather than the game ball continues to be launched in the first direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. The second element advantageous means makes it more advantageous.

As a result, while a player who wants to make the first element advantageous during a bonus game can fire the game ball in the first direction, a player who wants to make the second element advantageous can shoot the game ball in the first direction. Game balls can be launched in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide gaming properties that suit the tastes of each player.

In the game machine F1, a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and a ball entry means for the ball entry means. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball, a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a position where the ball entry means is closer than the first position. a variable means that can be changed from the second position to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball; and a variable means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position a first predetermined number of times during the execution of the bonus game. A gaming machine F2 comprising a control means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game balls shot in the first direction and the game balls shot in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. The variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball into the ball entering means than the first position. During execution of the bonus game, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times by the variable control means.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, which has the effect of further improving interest during the execution of the bonus game.

In the gaming machine F2, the first element advantageous means is configured such that the game balls continue to be launched in the first direction during the execution period of the bonus game, rather than the game balls continue to be launched in the second direction. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the rate at which the ball enters the ball entering means is increased.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, it is better for the game balls to continue to be launched in the first direction than to continue to be launched in the second direction during the execution period of the bonus game. Since the rate of balls entering the ball entering means is increased by the first element advantageous means, it is possible for players who wish to play a game during execution of a bonus game with a gameplay in which the percentage of balls entering the ball entering means is high. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be actively launched in the first direction.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second element advantageous means is configured such that it is better for the game balls to continue to be launched in the second direction during the specific period than for the game balls to continue to be launched in the first direction. A game machine F4 is characterized in that the number of game balls that reach the ball input means is increased.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F2 or F3, it is better to continue firing game balls in the second direction during a specific period than to continue firing game balls in the first direction. Since the number of game balls that reach the ball entering means is increased by the second element advantageous means, players who wish to have more game balls reach the ball entering means are actively encouraged to move in the second direction. This has the effect of allowing players to fire game balls.

In the gaming machine F4, the variable control means causes the first variable operation to be changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position. The second element advantageous means is executed the first number of times during a specific period, and the second element advantageous means is configured to cause game balls launched in the first direction to be executed a predetermined number of times in the first direction after the start of the specific period. The ball is prevented from reaching the ball landing means until the execution period of the variable motion ends, and at least part of the execution period of the first variable motion of the predetermined number of times is such that the specific period is The game machine F5 is characterized in that the period is a period after the start of the game in which the game ball launched in the second direction can reach the game ball.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position, the first variable operation of changing the variable means to the second position is performed a first number of times during a specific period by the variable control means. be done. The second element advantageous means allows the game ball launched in the first direction to reach the ball entering means after the start of the specific period until the end of the execution period of the first variable operation a predetermined number of times. suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the predetermined number of first variable operations is constituted by a period in which the game ball launched in the second direction can reach the target after the start of the specific period.

This allows the game ball to reach the ball entering means more times when the game ball is fired in the second direction than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. This has the effect of providing more opportunities for the ball to enter the ball entering means.

In the game machine F5, the second element advantageous means is configured such that the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the time period before the game ball launched in the second direction. A game machine F6, characterized in that the falling speed of the game ball launched in the first direction is suppressed so that it is longer than the period until it reaches the ball hitting means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F5, the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the time period required for the game ball launched in the second direction to reach the ball entry means. The second element advantageous means suppresses the descending speed of the game ball launched in the first direction so that the time period until it reaches the means is longer, so that the game ball launched in the first direction , it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from reaching the entering means before the predetermined number of first variable operations are completed. Therefore, firing the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of the ball entering the ball entry means more reliably.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the first variable operation has a predetermined period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position until the end of the change to the first position. The variable means is variable so as to be in a second period, and the first element advantageous means is such that the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball hitting means during the second period. If the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means during the second period, it is easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means than when the ball reaches the ball entering means. Characteristic gaming machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is configured such that the period from the start of variation from the second position to the first position until the end of variation to the first position is a predetermined second period. is made variable. The game ball fired in the first direction reached the ball entry means during the second period more than the game ball fired in the second direction reached the ball entry means during the second period. The first element advantageous means makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means.

As a result, when a game ball is fired in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is variable to the first position, also in the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility that the ball may enter the ball entering means, firing the game ball in the first direction can lengthen the period during which the ball can enter the ball entering means. Therefore, when the game ball is launched in the first direction, the possibility that the game ball that reaches the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means can be made higher than when the game ball is launched in the second direction. effective.

In the game machine F7, a first flow path is provided in which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down, and allows the flown down game ball to reach the ball hitting means from a third direction; a second flow path through which the ejected game ball can flow down and which causes the flown down game ball to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, the variable means: The game ball is configured such that the game ball can flow down the upper surface while being changed to the second position, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. The ball entry means is configured such that when the variable means is variable in the first position, a game ball can be entered from above, and the variable means is in the second position. In the state where the variable means is variable, the upper part is closed by the variable means, and the first element advantageous means is arranged to move the first element advantageously from the third direction toward the fourth direction. A gaming machine F8, characterized in that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means from the third direction through the first flow path. The game ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entering means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is being varied to the second position, a game ball can be played on its upper surface. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is configured to be inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, a game ball can enter the ball entering means from above, while in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the ball entering means The upper part of is closed by the variable means. When the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid from the third direction toward the fourth direction by the first element advantageous means.

As a result, a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the top surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period is directed back to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the top surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering means. On the other hand, since the third direction side above the ball entering means is in a state where the ball can enter from above earlier than the fourth direction side, the ball is fired in the first direction and from the third direction side during the second period. It is possible to easily enter the game ball that has reached the ball entering means. Therefore, the game ball fired in the first direction can have a higher entry rate when reaching the ball entry means more reliably than the game ball fired in the second direction.

In any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, if the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during the execution of the bonus game 1, a game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entering means during the execution of the first bonus game; A game machine F8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the game ball is transferred to the ball entering means during the execution of the first bonus game. When the ball does not enter, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during the execution of the first bonus game, a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entering means, the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the advantageous second gaming state, so the game ball enters the ball entering means. This has the effect that it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the player plays the bonus game and to play the game while the bonus game is being executed.

<Characteristic Group G> (Routes that are easy to win Denchu but difficult for attackers to win, and routes that are easy to win for attackers but difficult to win Denchu are set up on the right side)
A firing means capable of firing a game ball, a first flow path through which a game ball fired with a firing intensity within a specific range can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path; a first ball entry means provided in a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball and a game ball flowing down the second flow path is difficult to enter; a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball means; a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entry means; a variable means that is variable from the second position to a second position where it is difficult for the first ball entry means to enter the ball; a variable control means for changing the position; and a second control means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball and where it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the first flow path to enter the ball. A gaming machine G1 comprising: a ball entry means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of ball entry holes on the board surface. More specifically, there is a starting hole that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to enter a winning state, a grand prize opening into which a game ball can enter when the winning state is entered, etc. Some balls are provided with a plurality of ball entry ports that are controlled differently depending on the situation. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the ball entry opening to be aimed at can be changed depending on the gaming state, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of being able to change the direction of the ball to be shot depending on the gaming state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, until the gaming state is changed, it is necessary to continue firing the game ball in the firing direction according to the current gaming state, which makes the game monotonous and the player There was a problem in that it became difficult to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, there is also a method in which a specific ball entry port is provided with a plurality of shooting directions in which a game ball can enter, and the game is made to aim at the specific ball entry port in at least one game state. Although this is possible, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in configuring the board surface is reduced due to the plurality of flow paths heading toward a specific ball entrance.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the game ball fired by the firing means with a firing intensity within a specific range can flow down the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path. Become. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and where it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. There is. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and where it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the first flow path to enter.

As a result, by firing a game ball with a firing intensity within a specific range, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path, so it is possible to draw attention to the direction in which the game ball flows. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G1, the first flow path is capable of allowing a game ball fired with a firing intensity within a first range included in the specific range to flow down, and the second flow path is configured to allow a game ball to flow down within the first range included in the specific range. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a game ball that is included in the range and that is fired with a firing intensity within a second range different from the first range can flow down.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, game balls fired with a firing intensity within the first range included in the specific range can flow down the first flow path. Further, game balls that are included in the specific range and are fired with a firing intensity within a second range that is different from the first range can flow down the second flow path.

As a result, the flow path through which the game ball flows can be changed depending on whether the game ball is fired with a firing strength within the first range or with a firing strength within the second range, so that the player can Game balls can be flowed into any flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

In the game machine G2, a third flow path in which game balls fired with a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down, and in which it is difficult for the flown down game balls to enter the second ball entry means. and when the game ball enters any one of the third ball entry means into which the game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter, the second ball entry means, and the third ball entry means. and determining means for determining one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. a game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the first game state is set at a rate at which the game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the second ball entering means. The rate at which game balls flowing down the flow path enter the third ball entering means is high, and in the second gaming state, the game balls flowing down the third flow path enter the third ball entering means. The rate at which game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the second ball entering means is higher than the rate at which the balls enter the second ball entering means, and the variable control means identifies the ball by the determination by the determining means. The gaming machine executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied as a result of the determination. G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third channel is configured so that game balls fired with a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down. The game ball flowing down the third channel can enter the third ball entering means, and it becomes difficult to enter the second ball entering means. The determination is performed by the determining means based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. be done. In the first gaming state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the third flow path entering the third ball entering means is lower than the proportion of game balls flowing down the second flow path entering the second ball entering means. It will be more expensive. In the second game state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the second flow path entering the second ball entering means is higher than the proportion of game balls flowing down the third flow path entering the third ball entering means. It gets expensive. A variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable control means, assuming that a specific condition is satisfied when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result.

As a result, in the first game state, the determination by the discriminating means can be executed more efficiently if the flow is caused to flow down the third flow path, while in the second game state, it is better to let the flow flow down the second flow path. The discrimination by the discrimination means can be performed efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of switching the firing direction of the game ball according to the gaming state.

In the game machine G3, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the first channel and the game balls flowing down the third channel can enter. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3, the first ball entry means is positioned at a position where the gaming balls flowing down the first channel and the gaming balls flowing down the third channel can enter. Since this is provided, there is an effect that the player can select his/her favorite flow path during execution of the variable game.

In the game machine G4, the period until the game ball launched toward the first channel reaches the first ball entry means is the same as the period until the game ball launched toward the third channel reaches the first ball entry means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by comprising a suppressing means for suppressing a game ball from flowing down in the first channel so as to be longer than a period until reaching the first ball entering means.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine G4, the period until the game ball launched toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entry means is longer than the time required for the game ball launched toward the first flow path to reach the first ball entry means. Since the flow of the game ball in the first channel is suppressed by the suppressing means so that the period until the ejected game ball reaches the first ball entering means is longer, the first ball enters the first ball quickly during execution of the variable game. For players who want to reach the first ball entering means, the game ball can be fired aiming at the third flow path, while for players who want to enjoy the variable game for a longer time, , there is an effect that the game ball can be fired aiming at the first flow path.

In the gaming machine G5, the firing means is capable of firing game balls at a firing interval equal to or more than a specific firing interval, and the variable control means is configured such that during execution of the variable game, the variable means controls the second a first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position; a control means; during execution of the variable game, the variable means is set to the first position based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position; a second variable control means for varying the number of game balls between two positions, and the specific period includes the specific number of game balls fired at the specific firing interval after starting firing of the game balls toward the first flow path. A game machine G6 characterized in that the period is at least longer than the period until the game ball finishes flowing down the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game ball at a firing interval that is equal to or greater than a specific firing interval. During execution of the variable game, the first variable control is performed based on the fact that more than a predetermined number of game balls have entered the ball entering means after the variable means has been changed from the second position to the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position by the means. Further, during execution of the variable game, the second variable control means moves the variable means to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position. It is variable. The specific period is longer than the period from the start of firing game balls toward the first flow path until the specific number of game balls fired at a specific firing interval finish flowing down the first flow path. It is configured to be.

Thereby, when game balls are launched into the first channel, it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the first position before a specific number of game balls reach the first ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of predetermined benefits given when a game ball is launched into the first channel during execution of a variable game.

In any one of gaming machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is variable to the first position, the first ball entering means is configured to cause the first ball to enter the first ball more than the game ball flowing down the third flow path. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the gaming machine G7 is configured such that the percentage of game balls that flow down the flow path and enter the game ball is higher.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game balls flowing down the third flow path are Since the first ball entering means is configured so that the game ball that has flown down the road has a higher rate of entering the ball, it is possible for players who do not want to waste balls to receive the ball during execution of a variable game. This has the effect that the game ball can be launched aiming at the first flow path.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G7, a third position allows a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a fourth position makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the third position. a variable second variable means; and a control means for controlling the second variable means to vary from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of the first condition, A gaming machine G8 characterized in that in the first gaming state, the first condition is more difficult to satisfy than in the second gaming state.

According to gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines G3 to G7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. has been done. Based on the establishment of the first condition, the second variable means is controlled by the control means to vary from the fourth position to the third position. The configuration is such that the first condition is more difficult to satisfy in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

As a result, in the first game state, when the flow is caused to flow down the third flow path, the determination by the determination means can be executed more reliably and efficiently, while in the second game state, when the flow is caused to flow down the second flow path. This has the effect that the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed more reliably and efficiently.

<Characteristics H group> (Depending on the form of the jackpot performance, the firing direction of the corresponding expiration time is announced)
a firing means capable of firing a game ball; a first flow path through which a game ball fired in a first direction by the firing means can flow down; a second channel through which the game ball can flow down, a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the first condition being satisfied, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, a specific period ending means for ending the specific period based on the satisfaction of a second condition that can be satisfied when a game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path; a specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance, and the types of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means include at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance different from the first specific performance. a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types; a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting a firing direction of the game ball during the specific period; and a suggestive effect executing means executed by the suggestive effect executing means. As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the first specific effect being determined by the type determining means, and a first suggestion effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the second specific effect being determined. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a suggesting performance determining means for determining a second suggesting performance that suggests the second direction.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of ball entry holes on the board surface. More specifically, there is a starting hole that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to enter a winning state, a grand prize opening into which a game ball can enter when the winning state is entered, etc. Some balls are provided with a plurality of ball entry ports that are controlled differently depending on the situation. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the ball entry opening to be aimed at can be changed depending on the gaming state, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of being able to change the direction of the ball to be shot depending on the gaming state.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, until the gaming state is changed, it is necessary to continue firing the game ball in the firing direction according to the current gaming state, which makes the game monotonous and the player There was a problem in that it became difficult to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, there is also a method in which a specific ball entry port is provided with a plurality of shooting directions in which a game ball can enter, and the game is made to aim at the specific ball entry port in at least one game state. Although this is possible, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in configuring the board surface is reduced due to the plurality of flow paths heading toward a specific ball entrance.

According to the game machine H1, the game ball launched in the first direction by the launch means capable of launching the game ball can flow down the first flow path, and the game ball is launched in the second direction different from the first direction by the launch means. The game ball can flow down the second channel. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the first condition being satisfied, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the game ball is passed through the first channel or the second channel. The specific period is ended by the specific period ending means based on the fact that the second condition that can be satisfied when the water flows down is satisfied. A specific performance is executed by a specific performance execution means during a specific period. As the type of specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance different from the first specific performance. During the specific period, a suggestion performance that suggests the direction in which the game ball will be launched is executed by the suggestion performance execution means. As the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, the first suggestion performance that suggests the first direction is determined by the suggestion performance determination means based on the first specific performance being determined by the type determination means; , a second suggestion effect suggesting a second direction is determined based on the second specific effect being determined.

As a result, it is possible to suggest an appropriate firing direction according to the type of specific performance by means of a suggestive performance, so there is an effect that the performance mode can be suitably set.

The gaming machine H1 includes a ball entry means provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the first channel and the game balls flowing down the second channel can enter, and the second condition is satisfied. , can be established based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path allows the game ball that has flown down to enter the ball entry means more easily than the first flow path. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is configured such that a period of time until the game is reached tends to be long.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the first channel and the game balls flowing down the second channel can enter. The second condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. The second flow path is configured such that the period for the game balls flowing down to reach the ball entering means is likely to be longer than that in the first flow path.

As a result, when the second specific performance is determined, it is possible to make the period until the second condition is satisfied relatively long, thereby ensuring a sufficient performance period to execute the second specific performance. The effect is that it can be done.

The gaming machine H2 is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and a discriminating means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied a predetermined number of times, and the specific period setting means sets the specific period by assuming that the first condition is met when execution of the variable game is started. A game machine H3 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first position. has been done. A variable game in which a discrimination is performed by a discrimination means based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable means is varied from a second position to a first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The variable game execution means executes the game. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means when the first condition is satisfied that the execution of the variable game has started.

This has the effect that the performance mode can be suitably set during execution of the variable game.

In either gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is satisfied when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball entering means after the first condition is satisfied. Characteristic game machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is that a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball entering means after the first condition is satisfied. Since this holds true, it is possible to make the period until the second condition is satisfied by firing the game ball in the second direction longer than by firing the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient performance period for executing the second specific performance can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period during which an operation on the means is valid, and the second specific performance is one performance mode according to the operation content on the operation means from among a plurality of performance modes. execution of a selection performance, which is configured with a performance in which the player is made to select a performance mode, and executes one performance mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific performance based on the fulfillment of the second condition; A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is equipped with means.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, an operation valid period during which the operation on the operating means is valid is set by the operation valid period setting means during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific performance is composed of a performance that allows the player to select one performance mode from among a plurality of performance modes according to the content of the operation on the operating means. Based on the second condition being satisfied, one performance mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific performance is executed by the selected performance execution means.

As a result, when the second specific performance is executed, it is possible to select the player's preferred performance mode as the performance mode to be executed after the second condition is satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game later on.

The gaming machine H5 is provided with a display means capable of displaying images, and the second specific effect is such that a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and a plurality of images are displayed on the display means. One of the images includes at least a display mode in which one of the images is displayed in a specific display mode, and based on detecting an operation of the first operation content on the operation means during the operation validity period, the specified a mode changing means for changing the image displayed in the specific display mode; A gaming machine H6 comprising: an execution setting means for setting a performance mode corresponding to an image being displayed as a performance mode to be executed by the selected performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second specific performance, a plurality of images corresponding to each of a plurality of performance modes are displayed on the display means, and at least one display mode in which one image among the plurality of images is displayed in a specific mode. include. The image displayed in a specific display mode is changed by the mode changing means based on the detection of an operation of the first operation content on the operation means during the valid operation period. Based on the detection of the operation of the second operation content on the operation means during the operation validity period, the effect mode corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode is selected by the execution setting means and the selected effect execution means. It is set as the performance mode to be executed.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily select an image and decide on an effect by varying the operation content of the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period during which an operation on the means is valid, and the second specific performance is characterized in that it includes at least a performance mode that prompts a predetermined operation on the operation means. Game machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, an operation valid period during which the operation on the operating means is valid is set by the operation valid period setting means during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific performance includes at least a performance mode that prompts a predetermined operation on the operating means.

This allows the player to actively operate the operating means during execution of the second specific performance, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machines H5 to H7, operation determining means determines whether or not an operation on the operating means is performed during the operation valid period, and the operation determination unit continuously performs the operation determination over at least a predetermined number of the operation valid periods. A game characterized by comprising: determination control means for controlling the first suggestion effect to be determined by the suggestion effect execution means when the means does not determine that the operation on the operation means has been executed. Machine H8.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H5 to H7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation determining means determines whether or not the operation on the operating means has been executed during the valid operation period. Determination control means so that the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect execution means when the operation determination means does not determine that the operation on the operation means has been executed continuously for at least a predetermined number of operation validity periods. controlled by

As a result, the type of suggestive performance can be determined by taking into account the tendency of the player to operate the operating means, so there is an effect that the performance mode can be set more suitably.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z2. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Game machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Audio lamp control device (slave control means)
203a Special symbol holding ball storage area (discrimination information storage means)
223a Winning information storage area (specific information storage means)
S214 Bonus game execution means S305 Discrimination means S310 Second output means S406 Discrimination information acquisition means S408 Third output means S1002 Fourth output means S1015 First output means S4131 Signal reception means S4234 Restriction state setting means S4301 Specific information updating means S4307 Upon reception Determination means S4311 Second restriction state setting means S4402 Second release means S4415 First restriction state setting means S4504 Second effect execution means S4505 First effect execution means S4803 Release means S4804 Execution determination means

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Game machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby awarding an advantageous winning game to the player. In addition, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes in addition to the symbols, and attempts to improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of interesting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1 includes: a main control means that executes main control regarding the game; a slave control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means; The main control means includes a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a discriminating means that provides a first discriminating result to the player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. A bonus game execution means for executing an advantageous bonus game, and a first output for outputting an establishment signal indicating the establishment of the specific condition to the slave control means based on the establishment of the specific condition during execution of the bonus game. means, a second output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means, and acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. a discrimination information acquisition means; a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information; and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; and a third output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the slave control means is configured to output the discrimination information signal outputted by the first output means to the slave control means before the determination condition is satisfied. signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least a signal, the discrimination result signal outputted by the second outputting means, and the discrimination information signal outputted by the third outputting means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the reception of the result signal; a specific information storage means capable of storing specific information updated in correspondence with the discrimination information; specific information updating means capable of updating the specific information according to the discrimination information; and when the establishment signal is received by the signal receiving means, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated. 1 or 2, which is executed after the end of the bonus game, based on the fact that it is determined by the execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed. A second performance execution means is provided for executing the second performance over a plurality of execution periods of the first performance.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the first output means outputs the establishment signal based on the satisfaction of the termination condition for the bonus game.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, which responds to the received discrimination information signal, triggered by the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means. A reception determining means is provided for determining whether or not to execute the second performance using the determination result of the determining means.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the main control means determines whether the bonus game is played based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means. The fourth output means outputs a bonus game execution signal indicating that the bonus game is to be executed, the signal receiving means is configured to be able to receive the bonus game execution signal, and the slave control means is configured to receive the bonus game execution signal. a restriction state setting means for setting a restriction state in which execution of the determination by the reception time determination means is restricted based on the reception of the bonus game execution signal by the signal reception means; and a release means for releasing the restricted state.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the limiting state is set based on the execution determining means determining that the second effect is to be executed. means, a second restriction state setting means for setting the restriction state based on the reception determining means determining that the second performance is to be performed, and execution of the second performance by the second performance execution means. and a second release means for releasing the restriction state based on the completion of the restriction state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in the first discrimination result. , a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the fact that the specific condition is met during the execution of the bonus game, an establishment signal indicating that the specific condition is met is outputted by the first output means to the slave control means. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is outputted to the slave control means by the second output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A discrimination information signal corresponding to the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is outputted to the slave control means by the third output means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. In the slave control means, the establishment signal outputted by the first outputting means, the determination result signal outputted by the second outputting means, and the determination information signal outputted by the third outputting means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first performance execution means executes a first performance according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. Specific information that is updated in correspondence with the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is stored in the specific information storage means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the specific information is updated by the specific information updating means according to the discrimination information indicated by the received discrimination information signal. When the establishment signal is received by the signal receiving means, the execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. Based on the determination by the execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance execution means executes the second performance over the execution period of one or more first performances executed after the end of the bonus game. The performance is executed.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the first output means outputs an establishment signal based on the fulfillment of the bonus game ending condition. This has the effect that it can be determined whether to execute the second effect using the specific information updated according to the newer determination information.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means triggers the determination of the received discrimination information signal. Since the judgment result of the judgment means corresponding to the information signal is used to determine whether or not to execute the second performance by the judgment means at the time of reception, the effect is that the chances of executing the second effect can be further increased. be.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, a bonus game execution signal indicating that a bonus game is to be executed is outputted by the fourth output means based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit. The signal receiving means is configured to be able to receive the bonus game execution signal. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the bonus game execution signal by the signal receiving means, the restriction state setting means sets a restriction state in which execution of the determination by the reception time determination means is restricted. The restriction state is canceled by the cancellation means based on the establishment of the specific condition.
As a result, while the bonus game is being executed, the execution of the determination by the reception determining means is avoided until the specific condition is met, so that when the specific condition is met, the execution determining means determines whether to execute the second performance. This has the effect of suppressing unnecessary determination by the reception determining means before the reception is received.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first restriction state setting means sets the restriction state based on the fact that the execution determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. The restriction state is set by the second restriction state setting means based on the fact that the reception determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed. Based on the completion of the second performance by the second performance means, the second release means releases the restricted state.
This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the reception determining means from repeatedly determining whether to perform the second performance while the second performance has already been executed.

Claims (5)

a main control means that executes main control regarding the game;
A gaming machine comprising: a slave control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means;
The main control means is
a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination means;
a first output means for outputting an establishment signal indicating the establishment of the particular condition to the slave control means based on the establishment of the particular condition during the execution of the bonus game;
a second output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means;
Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information;
a third output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal according to the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied;
The slave control means is
A signal configured to be able to receive at least the establishment signal output by the first output means, the discrimination result signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination information signal output by the third output means. receiving means;
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal, based on the reception of the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means;
specific information storage means capable of storing specific information updated in correspondence with the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means;
Specific information updating means capable of updating the specific information according to the discrimination information indicated by the received discrimination information signal based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means;
Execution determining means for determining whether to execute a second performance using the specific information stored in the specific information storage device when the establishment signal is received by the signal receiving device;
Based on the determination by the execution determining means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance is executed over the execution period of one or more of the first performances to be executed after the end of the bonus game. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second effect execution means for executing. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first output means outputs the establishment signal based on fulfillment of a condition for ending the bonus game. Receiving, triggered by the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, determining whether or not to execute the second effect using the discrimination result of the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising time determining means. The main control means is
a fourth output means for outputting a bonus game execution signal indicating that the bonus game is to be executed based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit;
The signal receiving means is configured to be able to receive the bonus game execution signal,
The slave control means is
Restriction state setting means for setting a restriction state in which execution of determination by the reception time determination means is restricted based on reception of the bonus game execution signal by the signal reception means;
The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising a canceling unit that cancels the restricted state based on the establishment of the specific condition. a first restriction state setting means for setting the restriction state based on the execution determination means determining that the second performance is to be executed;
a second restriction state setting means for setting the restriction state based on the determination by the reception time determination means that the second performance is to be performed;
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising a second release means for releasing the restricted state based on completion of execution of the second performance by the second performance execution means.

Images